Download Toshiba RD-XS32SC Speaker System User Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL
Playback
RD-XS32SU
RD-XS32SC
Recording
HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER
Introduction
TOSHIBA HDD/DVD VIDEO RECORDER RD-XS32SU/RD-XS32SC
DIGITAL VIDEO
Editing
Library
OPERATIONS
Read “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first.
Function setup
Others
Printed in China
Printed on 70% Recycled Paper
RD-XS32SU_Ope_E001-180
1
S
PM0016170012
© 2004 Toshiba Corporation
04.3.18, 4:20 PM
Introduction
Table of contents
Introduction
Caution for safety ................................................ 4
About this product .............................................. 5
Compatible discs ................................................ 6
Index to parts and controls ..............................
Front panel ...........................................................
Rear panel ............................................................
Remote control .....................................................
Display .................................................................
12
12
14
16
18
Before operating this recorder ........................ 20
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU .. 23
Playing at various speeds ................................
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward ....................
Skipping to the next/previous chapter or track ........
Playing in slow-motion ..........................................
Playing frame by frame .........................................
64
64
65
65
66
Viewing still pictures
(Playing a disc that contains still pictures) .............. 66
Locating by entering the number .................... 67
Locating by entering the number of a desired
section ................................................................. 67
Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time
(Time Search) ....................................................... 68
Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window
(P in P Playback) ............................................... 69
Selecting the camera angle .............................. 70
Selecting Subtitles ............................................ 71
Recording
Before recording ...............................................
Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical format) ...
DVD-RAM physical format ....................................
Entering characters ...............................................
26
28
29
30
Recording a TV program .................................. 32
Selecting the Sound .......................................... 73
Viewing JPEG files ............................................ 76
Playing MP3/WMA files ..................................... 78
Programming a recording (REC MENU) .......... 40
Checking the current status and settings ...... 80
Operational status and setting details .................... 80
Using the time bar ................................................. 81
VCR Plus+ Recording ....................................... 46
Functions in the Quick Menu ........................... 82
Recording an external source .......................... 37
Others .................................................................
Relay recording ....................................................
A-B recording .......................................................
Reservation Disc (“Lock program record”) ..............
To delete recorded content ....................................
To protect recorded content ...................................
Technical information ............................................
48
48
48
49
50
50
51
Playback
Information on playback ................................... 54
Playing recorded contents
(CONTENT MENU) ............................................. 55
Playing a DVD video disc ................................. 60
Locating a title using the top menu ........................ 61
2
Zooming a picture ............................................. 72
Editing
Before editing .................................................... 86
Creating chapters .............................................. 90
Playlist editing
(Collecting desired scenes) ............................. 95
Creating thumbnails
(Changing the picture on the
CONTENT MENU) ............................................ 100
Before dubbing ................................................ 103
High speed Library dubbing
(Dubbing only a specified part) ..................... 105
Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later ......... 62
Dubbing selected Items
(Deleting specified parts together) ................ 108
Playing a TV program currently being
recorded ............................................................. 63
Rate conversion dubbing
(Dubbing at a modified bit rate) ..................... 112
Others
Before calling service personnel ................... 166
Error codes on the display window ............... 169
Combine Original Titles
(Combine two titles into one) ......................... 120
Recording duration ......................................... 170
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW ....... 122
Specification .................................................... 172
DVD-Video finalizing process ........................ 132
Limited Warranty DVD PLAYER/RECORDER .... 174
DV Recording
(Recording from a digital video camera) ...... 136
CANADIAN WARRANTY INFORMATION ....... 176
Language Code List ........................................ 171
Recording
Deleting Selected Items
(Deleting multiple specified parts) ................ 118
Introduction
Line-U dubbing
(Recording pictures while viewing them) ..... 116
Playback
Library
Using Library data ........................................... 140
Basic operation of the Library system .................. 140
Editing
Searching for a desired title ........................... 141
Changing the listing order ...................................... 141
Searching ........................................................... 141
Jumping ............................................................. 142
143
143
143
144
Library
Viewing Library data .......................................
Viewing title information ......................................
Viewing disc information ......................................
Maintenance of Library data ................................
Checking the disc space ................................ 146
Viewing a number and space of a disc .................. 147
Viewing remaining space .................................... 147
Function setup
Function Setup
150
154
157
159
160
161
163
Others
Customizing the function settings ................
DVD Player settings ............................................
Picture/Audio settings .........................................
Display settings ..................................................
Operational settings ............................................
DVD recorder operation ......................................
Management settings ..........................................
Setting of picture and sound quality for
recording ............................................................ 164
3
Introduction
Caution for safety
Read “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”,
“Precautions” and others of the “INSTALLATION GUIDE” first.
4
Introduction
About this product
“ ” may appear on the TV screen during operation.
“ ” means that the operation is not permitted by the
recorder or the disc.
Recording Restrictions
Copy-protected contents of DVD-Video disc, VIDEO
CDs or audio CDs on the market cannot be copied on
this recorder.
Contents without copy protection should be copied or
edited only in accordance with applicable copyright
laws, which may restrict copying or editing. Contents
that permit single copying (copy once contents) can be
recorded onto DVD-RAM discs, with some dubbing and
editing restrictions. DVD-R/RW discs cannot record
these contents.
Editing
Library
Compatiblity
In isolated cases, a disc bearing the DVD or CD logo
may not fully and properly play back all features. This
can be due, among other reasons, to problems and
errors that can occur during the creation or recording of
DVD and other software and the manufacture of
software discs (including blank discs). Moreover,
because of variations in the quality of discs, this
recorder may not be able to record on all discs that
bear a DVD-RAM, DVD-R or DVD-RW logo, but you
should not encounter difficulty if you use only high
quality recordable DVD discs. If you happen to
encounter difficulties playing or recording a DVD disc or
playing a CD disc, please feel free to call our Customer
Service Hotline at 1-800-319-6684.
Function setup
Others
Like any HDD, the HDD in the DVD recorder is a fragile
device that is susceptible to partial or complete failure if it
is jarred or as a result of use over time. It will not last
forever. Therefore, do not use the HDD for longer term
storage of programs you wish to retain. [If portions of the
HDD become damaged, programs recorded on those
portions may exhibit pixelization or block noise when
played back. Repeated playback of the program may
cause the problem to get worse and, eventually, the
program may become unplayable. Accordingly, if you
notice such noise in a program that you want to save,
you should transfer to a recordable DVD disc as soon as
possible.] Recordable DVD discs are also susceptible to
damage if not handled and stored carefully and some or
all of the programs on them may become unplayable.
You can reduce these risks by using high quality DVD
recordable discs and checking their playability from time
to time. If it becomes necessary to service your DVD
recorder, it may be necessary to delete some or all of the
programs on the HDD.
This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions for
this recorder. Some DVD video discs are produced in a
manner that allows specific or limited operation during
playback. As such, the recorder may not respond to all
operating commands. This is not a defect in the
recorder. Please refer to the notes on compatible discs
later in this Introduction and to the discussion of DVD
playback and features later in this manual.
Playback
About the hard disc drive (HDD)
Playback Restrictions
Recording
This DVD recorder is more similar to a computer than it
is to a standard DVD player. In addition to a
microprocessor, it contains a hard disc drive (an HDD),
an operating system, random access memory (RAM),
and a DVD-RAM/R/RW drive. The operating system
includes software stored on the HDD that is transferred
to the RAM when the machine is turned on and at other
times during operation. This transfer can take time.
Thus, when you turn on the DVD recorder, it may be a
minute or so before it is ready to use. Likewise, other
functions may not be performed as quickly as they would
on other AV equipment. In addition, because programs
stored on the DVD-RAM/R/RW drive cannot be accessed
as quickly as those stored on the HDD, accessing those
programs (or deleting a program from a DVD-RAM or
DVD-RW disc) may take more time. Please take these
factors into consideration as you use the DVD recorder.
Introduction
Some differences
5
Introduction
Compatible discs
When you want to play DVD or CD software or copy programs from the HDD to a recordable DVD, load an
appropriate disc into the recorder. There are many types and formats of discs. Please use the following
information to select an appropriate disc.
Notes
• Handle the disc according to the disc instruction manual.
• Depending on the data recording method or the disc status, playback or recording on this recorder may not be possible, even
if the disc is labeled as below. Toshiba cannot assure that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected.
Please see the discussion of compatibility on page 5.
For recording / playback
Disc
DVD-RAM
Mark
Specification
Remarks
• Single sided 4.7GB (12cm (43/4 in.))
• Double sided 9.4GB (12cm (43/4 in.))
Read carefully the section “On DVD-RAM
page 8).
discs” (
Select a DVD-RAM disc that shows a
statement on its package such as “this disc
can be used with video recorders and drives
compatible with 4.7GB DVD-RAM discs” or
“this disc can copy images that permit single
copying.”
DVD-R
• 4.7GB For General Ver.2.0
(12cm (43/4 in.))
Read carefully the section “On DVD-R discs”
page 9).
(
Depending on the disc status or the
recording equipment, playback of the disc
may not be possible on this recorder.
DVD-RW
• Ver. 1.1 or later (12cm
(43/4 in.))
Read carefully the section “On DVD-RW
page 9).
discs” (
Depending on the disc status or the
recording equipment, playback of the disc
may not be possible on this recorder.
Using different disc types for different purposes
DVD-RAM discs for your personal library
DVD-RAM discs comply with the global standard DVD-VR (Video Recording) format, and are optimized for recording of
TV programs. You can rewrite repeatedly without deterioration of an image quality, erase unnecessary parts, divide a
chapter, or specify playback area by frame. Its cartridge is suitable for a longer-term storage and family use, and its
large capacity of 9.4 GB allows more recording space.
DVD-R discs when creating your own original discs for distribution
DVD-R discs are designed to comply with the global standard DVD-Video format, and can be recorded only once.
DVD-R discs are convenient when you edit your original content (recorded personal events such as a wedding party)
with this recorder, transfer them to the recorder and make copies to send to your friends or relatives. The discs can be
played on other compatible DVD players. DVD-RW discs, which are rewriteable, can be used as well.
* DVD-R and DVD-RW may not be the best suited format for recording TV programs. Because of the way the discs
are formatted, it may not be possible to edit or divide the program as you may prefer, to record secondary languages,
or programs that are copy protected in a way that allows only one copy. (NOTE: “Copy once” protected programs
generally can be recorded to DVD-RAM discs.)
* This recorder records on a DVD-R/RW disc in DVD-Video format only. In DVD-VR format, recording is not possible.
page 122) are available.
* On DVD-R/RW discs, direct recording, copying or the method “Creating a DVD-Video” (
We cannot guarantee that DVD-RAM/R/RW discs recorded on this recorder will be playable on all DVD recorders/
players. Similarly, there is no guarantee that all DVD-RAM/R/RW discs recorded on other recorders will be playable on
this recorder.
6
Introduction
Disc
Mark
Recording
For playback only
DVD video
disc
• 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
• Region number 1 or ALL
• Color system: NTSC
The region number of this DVD recorder is 1.
If region numbers, corresponding to a
specific playable area, are printed on your
DVD video disc and you do not find 1 or
ALL , or the disc is encoded to permit
playback only in regions other than Region 1,
disc playback will not be allowed by the
recorder.
DVD-RW
• 12cm (43/4 in.)
• DVD-VR mode
It is not possible to play contents recorded
from programs which are not copy-free
Depending on the disc status, playback may
not be possible.
VIDEO CD
• 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
• Color system: NTSC
• Version 1.1 and 2.0
DIGITAL VIDEO
CD-R
• 12cm (43/4 in.)
• CD-DA (audio CD) format
Function setup
• 12cm (43/4 in.) / 8cm (31/4 in.)
Library
Audio CD
Editing
Remarks
Playback
Specification
Depending on the disc status, playback may
not be possible.
CD-RW
Others
• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.
• You cannot play non-standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.
• You cannot play discs with specialized encoding (such as SACD discs) or the DVD audio portions of DVD Audio
discs.
• This recorder uses the NTSC color system, and cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other color system
(PAL, SECAM, etc.), even if they have region marks 1 or ALL .
• Toshiba cannot assure that all discs bearing the DVD or CD logos will operate as expected. Please see the
discussion of compatibility on page 5.
7
Introduction
Compatible discs (Continued)
On DVD-RAM discs
Use only DVD-RAM discs that comply with DVDRAM standard Version 2.0 or 2.1.
The recorder cannot record on a disc formatted in any
other standard. When using such a disc, initialize it by
using the disc-format function of this recorder.
The recorder may not record, dub, or edit some DVDRAM discs, because they are edited/recorded with
another manufacture’s equipment or PC, contain a
large number of titles, or have little remaining capacity.
Also, a DVD-RAM disc may not be edited or recorded
if its title contains still pictures.
DVD-RAM discs formatted in UDF2.0 on a PC are not
compatible with this recorder. Before using these
discs, initialize them on this recorder.
This recorder complies with current copyright
protection technology and can copy a disc only when
the disc permits copying once. When there is no
indication on the disc, copying will not be allowed.
Such an indication on a disc is required also for the
Library Management database.
DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are
recommended for recording.
To protect recorded contents
Slide the write-protect tab to
“PROTECT” with something small
enough. The disc can play, but
cannot be edited or erased. Refer
to the instructions that come with
the disc.
PROTECT
When using a disc without a
cartridge (commercially
available discs)
Discs without cartridges can easily
attract fingerprints and dust, which
is the reason they are not recommended. If you
cannot avoid using them, handle with proper care.
When you write in a title column on a disc, use a pen
with a soft tip. Do not use a pen with a hard tip, such
as a ballpoint pen.
Recommended discs
The following discs have been tested with this recorder:
9.4 GB double-sided cartridge: Panasonic LM-AD240U
4.7 GB single-sided cartridge: Panasonic LM-AB120U
Two types of DVD-RAM discs are
available: ones with cartridges and ones
without cartridges. You can use either of
them with this recorder, but the former
ones are recommended.
In order to record highly detailed data, make sure the
disc is clean. DVD-RAM discs with cartridges are
easier to handle in this regard.
Do not open the cartridge shutter. The disc may not
play, or may not be recorded or edited once it
becomes dirty.
There are two types of DVD-RAM cartridges;
removable (TYPE 2/4) and not removable (TYPE 1). It
is recommended you do not remove the disc even
when you can.
Refer to the instruction manual that comes with the
disc if it is absolutely necessary to remove the disc.
Some commercially available cartridge discs cannot
be recorded or edited once the inside discs are
removed.
The company does not hold any responsibility to compensate the contents which should have been recorded,
and any losses or damages (e.g. losses of business profit, or business intermission) that may arise from
malfunction of this recorder (not recording/editing as intended).
Problems arising in the following situations are included.
• When a DVD disc recorded on this recorder is used in a DVD recorder of another manufacturer, or used
(insertion, playback, recording or editing) in a personal computer DVD drive.
• When a DVD that has been used as above is used again in this recorder.
• When a DVD disc recorded in a DVD recorder of another manufacturer, or in a personal computer DVD drive
is used.
Some functions such as Library may not work with PC discs.
8
Standards
Marks on DVD video discs
The following are examples of marks and the meanings.
Mark
Meanings
Recording
DVD-R for General Ver.2.0/2.1 discs can be used for
recording and playback.
Discs compatible with 2X speed recording (labeled
Ver.2.1/2X etc.) and discs compatible with 4X speed
recording (labeled Ver.2.1/4X etc.) can also be used.
Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120
min.” etc.
DVD-R for authoring Ver.1.1 cannot be used.
Introduction
On DVD-R discs
Number of audio streams
recorded in the disc.
(2 streams such as English and
Japanese in this example.)
2
Recording conditions
Recommended discs
3
Tested discs
Number of subtitle languages
recorded in the disc.
(2 subtitle languages are
recorded in this example.)
Number of camera angles
recorded in the disc.
(3 camera angles are recorded in
this example.)
Editing
Taiyo-Yuden 4x
2
Playback
Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted
(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.
Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this
recorder can only be used to record copy-free
material.
Panasonic LM-RF120 (4.7GB/120 min.)
On DVD-RW discs
4:3
Discs labeled DVD-RW Ver.1.1 can be used.
Discs compatible with 2X speed recording (labeled
Ver.1.1/2X etc,) can also be used.
Select discs labeled “for video,” “for recording,” “120
min.” etc.
LB
16:9 LB
Images for which copying is prohibited or restricted
(copy once or copy prohibited) cannot be recorded.
Even if the disc is labeled as CPRM compatible, this
recorder can only be used to record copy-free
material.
DVD-VR mode recording is not possible.
16:9 PS
Note
• Each disc has a limitation of its rewriteability.
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9
wide picture shape.
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will
display them in the letter box
style.
Pictures are recorded in the 16:9
wide picture shape.
TVs with 4:3 aspect ratio will
display them in the pan scan style
(one or both sides of pictures
are cut).
Others
Recommended discs*
Victor/JVC VD-RW47BU
Pictures are recorded in the letter
box picture shape (4:3 aspect
ratio with horizontal black bars in
the top and bottom of pictures).
Function setup
Recording conditions
Library
Standards
Pictures are recorded in the
standard picture shape
(4:3 aspect ratio).
Actual picture shape may vary
depending on the aspect ratio or
mode selection of the TV.
* Operation has been confirmed with recommended discs
and tested discs, but some other discs may not be
usable.
9
Introduction
Compatible discs (Continued)
Structure of disc contents
On handling discs
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the
titles are subdivided into chapters.
VIDEO CDs/audio CDs are divided into tracks.
Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
DVD video disc
Title 1
Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Yes
Playback side
Do not stick paper or tape to discs.
VIDEO CD / audio CD
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Divided contents of a DVD video disc.
Roughly corresponds to a story title in short
stories.
Chapter: Divided contents of a title. This corresponds
to a chapter in a story.
Track:
Divided contents of a VIDEO CD or an audio
CD.
No
Title:
Each title, chapter, or track is assigned a number, which
is called “title number”, “chapter number”, or “track
number” respectively.
Some discs may not have these numbers.
When you record on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, one
recording will always equal one title. You can divide a title
into several chapters by marking borders in it to facilitate
scene search.
On cleaning discs
Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and
sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center
outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.
Yes
No
If you cannot wipe off the dust with a soft cloth, wipe
the disc lightly with a slightly moistened soft cloth and
finish with a dry cloth.
Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,
benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic
spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.
On storing discs
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight
or near heat sources.
Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and
dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing
objects on discs outside of their case may cause
warping.
10
Introduction
Discs and purposes
The table shows main functions which are available on this recorder per disc category.
This will help you choose discs.
DVD-R disc
Suitable for repeat use of the
disc, and data storage for
video library. Copy once
contents can be recorded
using a compatible disc.
Suitable for saving data in
DVD-Video format to play on
compatible devices.
Suitable for saving data in
DVD-Video format to play on
compatible devices.
You can erase recorded
contents to use the disc
repeatedly.
Once you execute DVDVideo finalizing process on a
recorded disc so that it can
be played on other players,
you cannot make addition,
correction and deletion of
contents on the disc.
No preparatory steps
required, however initializing
is recommended.
Initialize the disc.
No preparatory steps
required.
Erasing recorded contents
Yes
Yes
If the disc has been executed
DVD-Video finalizing
process, first cancel the
process then delete contents.
Yes
Deleting contents cannot
restore the disc space.
After you execute DVDVideo finalizing process on a
recorded disc, you cannot
delete contents of the disc.
Recording additional content
on a recorded disc
Yes
Yes
If the disc has been executed
DVD-Video finalizing
process, first cancel the
process then delete contents.
Yes
After you execute DVDVideo finalizing process on a
recorded disc, you cannot
add contents to the disc.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
After you execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on a recorded
disc, you cannot name a title or
create a thumbnail.
Yes
Yes
After you execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on a recorded
disc, you cannot name a title or
create a thumbnail.
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Indexing recorded contents
Naming a title
Creating a thumbnail
Collecting favorite scenes
(Playlist Editing)
Making a new title from a Playlist
containing favorite scenes
(Copy within the same disc)
Playing contents recorded on
this recorder, on other devices
Contents can be played on
any devices compatible with
DVD-RAM discs. Follow the
instruction of the device to
play.
When a message appears and Initialize the disc.
If it is still unusable, try to
the loaded disc cannot be
execute DVD-RAM physical
used:
format.
Execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on this
recorder. This process
makes the disc playable on
other compatible devices.
(Some models excepted.)
Initialize the disc.
Others
Yes
Function setup
Yes
Library
Yes
Editing
Recording a TV program
Playback
For the first use
DVD-RW disc
Recording
Characteristics on this
recorder
DVD-RAM disc
Execute DVD-Video
finalizing process on this
recorder. This process
makes the disc playable on
other compatible devices.
(Some models excepted.)
–
11
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls
See pages with arrows for details.
Front panel
12 13
1
2
3 4
14
15
16 17
5
18
19
20
6
7
21
8
9 10 11
22
* The above illustration displays the front panel with the cover open. See the following page on how to open or close the cover.
1 ON/STANDBY button
pages 20, 21
Turns the power on/restores the unit in the
standby mode.
2 Three mode button (HDD, TIMESLIP, DVD)
page 32, 55, 60
Selects recording/playback media.
3 INPUT SELECT button
page 38
Pressing repeatedly selects between various input
sources.
page 20, 33
4 CHANNEL buttons
Selects the channel.
(This is not avaialble to select set top box
channels regardless of the IR control cable
connection and the set top box setting.)
5
(OPEN/CLOSE) button
page 20
Opens and closes the disc tray.
6
(PAUSE) button
page 35, 60
Stops playback or recording momentarily.
7
12
(REC) button
Starts recording.
page 34
8
(STOP) button
page 35, 60
Stops playback or recording.
9 PICTURE SEARCH (
) button
Scans the picture backwards.
page 64
) button
10 PICTURE SEARCH (
Scans the picture forward.
page 64
11
(PLAY) button
Starts playback.
page 60
page 20, 21
12 ON/STANDBY indicator
Displays the operational state of the recorder.
13 Remote sensor
GUIDE”
page 12 in “INSTALLATION
14 DV IN connector
page 136
Use this when recording from a digital video
camera.
page 37
15 INPUT 2 jacks
Use this when recording from other input source
such as a VTR or a camcorder.
Introduction
Recording
Playback
Editing
To open or close the cover on the front panel
Put your finger on the left edge of the cover and pull it
down to open.
17 Media indicator
Indicates the current media.
19 HDD indicator
Illuminates in the HDD mode.
Function setup
18 Operation Status Indicator (HDD)
Indicates the operation status of the HDD.
: Recording
: Playing
: Copying within the disc
Note
• Do not place a heavy object on the cover while it is
open. Doing so may damage the recorder.
Others
20 Operation Status Indicator (DVD)
Indicates the operation status of the DVD.
: Recording
: Playing
: Copying within the disc
21 Disc tray
page 20
Place a disc to play or record.
22 Front panel display
Library
16 Three mode indicator
page 32, 55, 60
Indicates the selection by the three mode button.
page 18
13
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)
Rear Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
RF IN
(FROM ANT.)
Y
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
BITSTREAM/PCM
VIDEO
R
RF OUT
(TO TV)
VHF/UHF
S-VIDEO
L
OUTPUT1
INPUT3
CHANNEL
CHANGE
OUTPUT2
IR
7
page 15 in “INSTALLATION
1 AC IN socket
GUIDE”
Connects to the supplied power cord.
2 Ventilation fan
3 VHF/UHF RF IN (FROM ANT.) input socket
page 14 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Connects to an antenna or cable signal.
4 VHF/UHF RF OUT (TO TV) output socket
page 14 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Connects the supplied coaxial cable to a TV.
page 37
5 INPUT1/INPUT3 jacks
Use this to connect the recorder to output jacks of
external devices such as another player or
camcorder.
page 20 in
6 COMPONENT OUTPUT jacks
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Ouptuts video signals to a connected TV or
monitor.
Connects to a TV or monitor equipped with
component video jacks.
14
PR
PB
COMPONENT OUTPUT
R
INPUT1
L
VIDEO
R
L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
8 9
R
L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
10
7 CHANNEL CHANGE IR jack
page 19 in
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Connect the supplied IR control cable to control
cable/satellite channels according to timer
programs.
8 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT BITSTREAM/PCM
page 22, 23, 24 in
COAXIAL jack
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Use this to connect the recorder to an audio
receiver equipped with a coaxial digital audio input
jack.
9 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT BITSTREAM/PCM
page 22, 23, 24 in
OPTICAL jack
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Use this to connect the recorder to an audio
receiver equipped with an optical digital audio
input jack.
When connecting the optical digital cable, remove
the cap and fit the connector into the jack firmly.
When not using the jack, keep the cap inserted to
protect it from dust intrusion.
Introduction
Recording
Playback
Editing
10 OUTPUT1/OUTPUT2 jacks
page 15, 17, 20
in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”
Outputs video and audio signals to a connected
TV or amplifier.
Library
Function setup
Others
15
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)
Remote control
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
SL
LIBRARY
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
ENTER
18
19
20
21
16
DJ
SE
/A
E
13
14
15
16
17
AM
12
AR
FR
CH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
TV/VIDEO CHANNEL VOLUME INPUT SELECT
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
45
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLEAR
46
DELETE
SETUP
47
ENTER
0
+10
48
49
50
51
52
Introduction
1 OPEN/CLOSE button
page 20, 21
32 PICTURE SEARCH button
3 TOP MENU button
4 ANGLE button
33 ENTER button
page 61
34 PLAY button
page 70
5 SUBTITLE button
6 HDD button
page 65
page 32, 55, 60
9 LIBRARY button
page 150
37 STOP button
40 P in P button
page 40
page 40, 66
13 Direction buttons ( / / / )
page 35
page 81
page 55, 150
page 69
page 72
42 PROGRESSIVE buttton
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
43 INPUT SELECT button
button
page 46
page 34
45 EXTEND button
page 43, 45
46 Number buttons
page 46, 67
page 55
page 81
18 REMAIN button
page 27
19 DIMMER button
page 19
47 SETUP button
20 FL SELECT button
48 REC MODE button
page 19
21 Buttons for TV operation
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
page 46 in
page 20, 21
50 T.SEARCH button
24 CHANNEL buttons
25 AUDIO button
page 20, 33
page 73
page 32,55,60
27 INSTANT SKIP button
page 64
28 INSTANT REPLAY button
page 64
29 CONTENT MENU button
page 55, 95
30 EDIT MENU button
page 108
52 DELETE button
page 67
page 67
page 50
*1 MENU
Use this to display a menu screen that is recorded on
a DVD video disc.
Operate the menu screen as the same manner as
page 61)”.
“Locating a title using the top menu (
A menu screen is not recorded on some discs.
*2 RETURN
Returns to the previous screen (the screen may be
specified depending on the disc).
Refer to the instructions of the disc.
17
Others
23 RETURN button*2
page 34
49 TV CODE button
page 46 in
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”
51 CLEAR button
22 ON/STANDBY button
page 150
Function setup
17 DISPLAY button
26 DVD button
page 38
Library
16
page 20 in
page 35, 56
44 VCR Plus+ button
15 REC button
page 90
Editing
41 ZOOM button
page 65
12 FRAME/ADJUST button
page 24, 82
39 CHP DIVIDE button
page 140
14 PAUSE buttton
button
38 TIME BAR button
page 23
10 REC MENU button
11 SLOW button
36
page 62, 63
8 EASY NAVI button
page 60
Playback
7 TIMESLIP button
page 55, 150
35 QUICK MENU button
page 71
page 55, 64
Recording
2 MENU button*1
31 SKIP button
Introduction
Index to Parts and Controls (Continued)
Display
1
11
2 3
12
4
5
13
6 7
8
14
1 PBC indicator
page
Illuminates when PBC function is “On” (
156) and a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD is loaded.
2 Angle icon
page 70
Illuminates when playing a scene recorded with
multi angles.
3 Program recording indicator
Illuminates when the recorder holds a timer
program.
4 Bit rate indicator
Illuminates when displaying the bit rate selected
for recording, or when displaying the actual bit
rate.
5 REMAIN (Remaining space) indicator
Illuminates when an available recording time is
displayed.
6 VCD/CD indicator
VCD : Illuminates when a VIDEO CD is loaded.
CD : Illuminates when an audio CD is loaded.
18
10
9
15
16
7 Title indicator
Illuminates when a title number is displayed.
8 TRK (Track) indicator
Illuminates when a track number is displayed.
9 CHP (Chapter) indicator
Illuminates when a chapter number is displayed.
10 SAP indicator
Illuminates when receiving a SAP broadcast.
11 DUBBING indicator
Illuminates when copying.
12 PROGRESSIVE indicator
Illuminates when video signals are output in the
progressive format.
page 157
13 Picture quality mode indicator
The current picture quality mode lights up.
The modes are: MN (Manual)/SP (Standard Play)/
LP (Long Play)/SP+LP+MN (Auto)
Introduction
Dimming the display
Pressing the DIMMER button on the remote control changes the brightness of the display (normal/dimmed/off).
Recording
Switching the display
Every time you press the FL SELECT button, the display changes between the channel, title number, and time.
The display may not change, depending on the disc or recording conditions.
Playback
Editing
14 Channel indicator
Displays the current channel or other numbers
such as a title number, track number, bit rate or
input selection.
15 Multi display
Library
Displays the current time, elapsed time, remaining
time, starting time of programmed recording, chapter
number or message, etc.
Function setup
16 Analog output level indicator
Displays the analog output level.
L+R: Stereo and bilingual (left (main) channel and
right (sub) channel)
L : Left (main) channel
R : Right (sub) channel
Off : Mono
Level indicator may not show exact sound level. It
only shows the average level.
Others
19
Introduction
Before operating this recorder
Is your recorder ready?
Loading a disc
• Refer to the supplied “INSTALLATION GUIDE”
manual and finish the necessary preparations.
• Turn on the connected equipment such as a TV or
audio system and select the input from the recorder.
Check disc compatibility beforehand (
and use a proper playable disc.
Turning the power on
(This owner’s manual instructions are based on
the assumption that all proper connections have
been completed and the TV is turned on.)
Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the
recorder or on the remote control.
page 6, 7)
Caution
• Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray. Neglecting this
may cause serious personal injury. Keep a close watch on
children.
• Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.
1 Open the disc tray.
on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE
Press
button on the remote control.
ON/STANDBY button
button
ON/STANDBY indicator
ON/STANDBY button
OPEN/CLOSE button
CHANNEL buttons
When the power turns on, the ON/STANDBY indicator
changes from red (standby mode) to green (operation).
After a few seconds, a start-up screen appears.
The following icon appears at the top right corner of
the screen.
e.g.
Loading
2 Insert a disc.
Disc without a cartridge
Insert with the playback side down.
There are two kinds of disc size. Place a disc to fit
the guide. If a disc is out of the guide, it may result
in damage to the disc or malfunction.
When this icon disappears, the recorder is ready to
operate. If the disc drive contains a disc, it takes a
little longer to start up.
Viewing TV channels through this recorder
After turning the power on, the recorder will output TV
channel signals to the connected TV (also in the stop
mode).
You can select a desired channel by pressing the
CHANNEL or the number buttons.
(These buttons can select channels of a connected
page
cable box or satellite system, if “IR control” (
37, in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”) is set to “On”.)
20
Place a disc in the
inside hollow.
21
Others
Note
• Turning the power off also unlocks the disc tray.
Function setup
The “Unloading” icon appears at the top right corner of
the screen, and the ON/STANDBY indicator turns red,
then the power turns off (Standby mode.)
You can lock the disc tray.
Press and hold on the front panel or PAUSE on
the remote control for longer than about 3
seconds.
To unlock, during stop press the button for longer than
about 3 seconds.
Library
Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel of the
recorder or on the remote control.
Disc tray lock
Editing
Turning the power off
Note
• If there are any performance malfunctions of the HDD or
the DVD-RAM drive, immediately discontinue use of this
recorder, and disconnect the power cord from a wall outlet,
then contact your dealer. Continuous use of the recorder in
such a condition will aggravate the condition and result in
increased cost and repair time.
Playback
Notes
• Use the button on the front panel or the remote control to
open and close the disc tray. Do not push or hold the disc
tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the recorder to
malfunction.
• Do not insert a disc which is unplayable, or any object
other than a playable disc.
• Do not apply downforce to the disc tray. Doing so may
cause the recorder to malfunction.
• If the disc tray stops while closing, the mechanical
protection system of this recorder will open it. Do not force
it to close. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• If the disc tray will not open, turn the recorder off, and
press the
button on the front panel or the OPEN/
CLOSE button on the remote control. This may turn the
recorder on and open the disc tray. If it still won’t open,
contact your nearest TOSHIBA dealer.
Recording
3 Close the disc tray.
on the front panel or the OPEN/CLOSE
Press
button on the remote control.
Caution
• If the power fails or the power cord is disconnected from a
wall outlet while the recorder is in operation (ON/STANDBY
indicator lit in green), the HDD or a loaded disc may
become recording disabled. In such a case, executing an
initialization of the disc using the formatting function of the
recorder may refresh it. However, all contents stored on the
disc will be completely erased by this initialization process.
• This recorder may indicate alert messages with some
DVD-RAM discs right after insertion. If such a disc is used
for playback or recording on other equipment, all data in
the disc may be damaged and the disc will not be played.
By executing an initialization of the disc using the
formatting function of the recorder, the disc will become
operational.
• If the recorder freezes and does not respond at all, leave it
alone for about 15 minutes or longer. This may restore the
recorder. After the recorder has recovered, turn it off once
and turn it on again to use as usual. If the recorder is still
inoperable after more than 15 minutes have passed, press
and hold the ON/STANDBY button on the front panel or the
remote control for about 10 seconds or longer. The
recorder is forced to quit and the power turns off. Turn the
recorder on again and use it as usual. (This is an
emergency measure, which may cause losses and/or
damages of data. Avoid casual use of this measure. If you
try this while the recorder is working properly, especially
while the “Loading” or “Unloading” icon is flashing, it may
result in initializing of the HDD.) (This 15-minute measure
is available only when “Screen protector” is set to “On.”
page 159))
(
Introduction
DVD-RAM disc with cartridge (TYPE1/TYPE2/TYPE4)
Single sided
Turn the printed side up, and insert the cartridge
into the tray frame following the direction of the
arrow on the cartridge.
Double sided
Turn the desired recording/playback side up, and
insert the cartridge into the tray frame following the
direction of the arrow on the cartridge.
Introduction
Before operating this recorder (Continued)
Start-up/Shutdown (closing) icons
Status display
These icons are displayed at the top right corner of the
screen when startup or finishing. While they are
flashing, the recorder is operating as follows:
Each time you operate the recorder, the following
displays appear on the TV screen to indicate the
status of the recorder.
Status display
Loading
Un
loading
Open
Close
Start-up, reading a disc, finishing the
recording
Unloading a disc, finishing the
operation
Opening a disc tray
Closing a disc tray
e.g.
Main on-screen displays
(Depending on the disc, some of these may not
appear.)
: Playback
: Pause
: Stop
: Fast-forward
: Fast-reverse
: Forward skip*
: Reverse skip*
x1/2 : Forward slow-motion
x1/2
: Reverse slow-motion
: Forward frame by frame playback
: Reverse frame by frame playback
: Recording
: Recording pause
Title
End : When title playback is completed
: Instant skip
: Instant replay
Chapter
Divide : Chapter division
: Forward skip by 1/20
: Revers skip by 1/20
* Accompanied with the followings:
HDD DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R :
Title number/title name and chapter number/
chapter name
DVD-VIDEO :
Title number and chapter number
:
VCD
CD
Track number
Notes
• To disable the status display, set “On screen display”
(
page 159) to “Off.”
• You can add the current status of the settings to this
display. See
page 80.
22
Introduction
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU
EASY NAVI
Introduction
The EASY NAVI button opens the “EASY NAVI Main Menu”, a main gate to the functions of this recorder.
From this menu, you can access the desired functions while viewing a current picture.
Additionally, the QUICK MENU button provides you a sub menu of the current function.
Press EASY NAVI.
Sound is muted and the following GUI appears. (Actual displays vary depending on operational status.)
e.g.
EASY
NAVI
HDD/DVD
EASY NAVI
ENTER
HDD
TV:12ch
005 2004/04/03 07:00am TV:18
Finder
(00:54:30)
Original
Play Time 00:10:15
TR
Time Slip
Playback
STOP
Recorded title
last selected
HDD
Cursor
Play Contents
Timer Recording
Delete Title
Finalize (R/RW)
PLAY
Disc
Main Menu
TV Viewing
/ / /
Recording
Appears when the finder shows
the current broadcast.
DV Recording
Format (RAM/RW)
Functions
Dubbing
Setup
Operating the finder (For the HDD, DVD-RAM discs, DVD-R/RW
discs recorded on this recorder and not finalized yet)
Editing
1) When the cursor is on the finder, press / .
You can view thumbnails of recorded contents.
• You can select the drive by pressing the HDD or DVD button.
3) To stop, press STOP.
A current channel broadcast appears. (“TV:xxxch” accompanies.)
page
• Pressing the REC button starts recording. On recording, see
25.
Library
2) When you find a desired content, press PLAY or ENTER.
The content is played.
• Pressing the ENTER button enlarges the finder’s playback picture to
the full of the screen.
page 64.
• You can change playback speed. See
Item selection
Function setup
Press / / / to select an item, then press ENTER.
(Unavailable features are grayed out.)
Item
TV Viewing
Play Contents
Timer Recording
Delete Title
Dubbing
Finalize (R/RW)
Format (RAM/RW)
Setup
page
A current channel’s broadcast returns.
–
Recorded contents are listed in a thumbnail view.
55
A list of timer programs appears.
40
The setting menu for recording contents from equipment
connected to the DV terminal.
136
You can delete the current content.
Operate according to the message.
50
You can access a menu to dub the current content.
106
You can execute the DVD-Video finalizing process on the
loaded disc.
132
You can format the loaded disc.
28
A setup menu appears.
150
Others
DV Recording
Function
(Continued)
23
Introduction
Key operation - EASY NAVI & QUICK MENU (continued)
To exit the EASY NAVI
Quick Menu operation
Press EASY NAVI again.
To access various optional functions of this recorder,
open the Quick Menu. The Quick Menu displays a list
of selections relevant to your current mode.
Note
• For a disc other than the specified one, the finder cannot
be operated. To play the disc, exit the EASY NAVI then
press the PLAY button, or select the “Play Contents”
function.
Opening a Quick Menu
1) Press QUICK MENU.
The following menu (“Quick Menu”) appears.
(Actual selections vary depending on operational
status.)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Restart title
Title information
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Exit
2) Press /
ENTER.
to select an item, then press
To exit the Quick Menu
Press QUICK MENU again.
Alternatively
Select “Exit” with / , then press ENTER.
24
Hint on reading this manual
The following icons show the playable discs for each
function described on this instruction manual.
HDD
: HDD
DVD-RAM : DVD-RAM disc
DVD-RW : DVD-RW disc
DVD-R : DVD-R disc
DVD-VIDEO : DVD video disc
VCD
: VIDEO CD
CD
: Audio CD
(For CD containing JPEG or MP3/WMA files,
see
page 76, 78.)
Most instructions are based on remote control operation,
unless otherwise noted. You can use the buttons on the
remote control and those on the main unit as well when
they have the same function.
If copy protection signal is detected during
recording on this recorder, the recording
automatically pauses and a message appears. In
this case, the PAUSE button cannot release the
recording. (It is possible to end the recording by
pressing the STOP button.) If the copy protection
signal continues, the recording will terminate.
Recording
Recording variations for many types of programs or
situations.
Before recording
Recording a TV program
Recording an external source
Programing a recording (REC
MENU)
VCR Plus+ Recording
Others
Recording
Before recording
Please be sure to read this critical background information prior to making a recording.
This recorder is equipped with a built-in HDD. Conventional video cassette recorders have required
tapes to record, while this recorder enables recording on the HDD whenever you want, without
selecting an available tape or confirming its recording time or tape remaining.
Further, the DVD-RAM drive on this recorder can record on a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc in the same way as
a tape. You can also copy contents recorded on the HDD to a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc to create your
own library.
Is your recorder ready?
Before recording a TV program on this recorder,
insure that channels you want to record are correctly
tuned in on this recorder.
If not tuned in, read the separate “INSTALLATION
GUIDE” volume again, and confirm all the necessary
connections and settings have been done.
Also, insure the clock is set precisely for program
recording. Set the clock using the “Initial settings”
page 31, INSTALLATION GUIDE).
menu (
Disc initializing
Whenever you use a new DVD-RAM/RW disc on this
recorder, be sure to initialize the disc. For DVD-RAM
disc, initialization is indispensable to the database
system of this recorder.
Normally, the HDD does not need to be formatted. If
the HDD does not work normally due to a problem,
format the HDD for possible recovery. Once you
format the HDD, all the recorded titles and Library
information are deleted. Before formatting, be sure to
write library information to a DVD-RAM disc and check
any titles to be deleted.
DVD-RW discs can be emptied by initializing.
DVD-R discs can be used on this recorder without
initializing.
For details of initialization of DVD-RAM/RW discs, see
page 28.
If an initialized DVD-RAM disc is still unusable, it may
become usable by executing “DVD-RAM physical
format” in the “Management settings” menu.
page 29.
For “DVD-RAM physical format”, see
Note on recording on a DVD-RAM disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
page 6, 8).
DVD-RAM disc to record on (
Some discs may need to be formatted for use on this
recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute
disc formatting. Follow the procedure displayed onscreen to format the DVD-RAM disc compatible with
this recorder.
Some DVD-RAM discs formatted on a PC may not be
usable.
26
Note
• This recorder records on a DVD-RAM disc if it complies
with DVD-RAM standard Version 2.0 or 2.1. However, you
may not record on some DVD-RAM discs that have
complicated contents (often, to protect the recorded data).
When you select a DVD-RAM discs that has already been
recorded, check that the disc is suitable for recording or the
remaining time of the disc is displayed. It is recommended
to use a new DVD-RAM disc for an important recording.
Note on recording on a DVD-RW disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
page 6, 9).
DVD-RW disc to record on (
Some discs may need to be initialized for use on the
recorder. A message will appear asking you to execute
disc initializing. Follow the procedure displayed onscreen for initialize the DVD-RW disc compatible with
this recorder.
Some DVD-RW discs initialized on a PC may not be
usable.
To play a DVD-RW disc recorded on this recorder on
other devices, finalize the DVD-RW disc on this
page 132)
recorder. (
The finalization disables the disc’s rewritability. To
rewrite a finalized DVD-RW disc, cancel the
page 135).
finalization (
• On DVD-RW discs recorded on other devices, you
cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or
cancel the finalize process, or add recordings on
this recorder.
• You cannot rewrite or edit a DVD-RW disc if
recorded in DVD-VR mode.
• DVD-RW discs which are recorded on other
devices and not finalized yet, cannot be read on this
recorder. Do not rush to initialization. Check that the
contents can be erased or not.
When “HDD recording is not possible due to...”
appears
The HDD is full. To record new content, delete
unnecessary titles or transfer some content to a DVDRAM disc.
Function setup
Note
• You can also check the capacity of the disc by selecting
“Disc budget calculation” from the Quick Menu within the
REC MENU (
page 44).
Library
2) After checking the capacity, press the button
again to turn off the display.
On a programmed recording across the changeover of Daylight-saving time
• When the clock gains across Daylight-saving time
during a programmed recording, it means that the
recording completion time is consequently set onehour earlier. In this case, set the programmed
recording one-hour longer in advance. If not set
accordingly, the programmed recording stops onehour shorter.
• When the clock loses across Daylight-saving time
during a programmed recording, it means that the
recording completion time is consequently set onehour later. In this case, as the programmed
recording continues one-hour longer, delete
unnecessary chapters by chapter dividing after the
completion of recording.
Editing
To check space remaining on a disc
1) Press the REMAIN button.
The current capacity per disc is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. The current capacity of the
selected drive is displayed on the front panel display.
Playback
If you want to record contents which will be copied
to a DVD-R/RW disc later on
page 36.
See
When the programmed settings overlap
Before the first recording is completed, the second
program is scheduled to begin recording. When using
a DVD-RAM disc, the recording of the previous
program stops 15 seconds before the next program
starts. (If you have been recording over 9 hours on the
same drive, the current recording stops approximately
2 minutes before the next programme starts.)
When using a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc, the recording
of the previous program stops about 2 minutes before
the next program starts, to complete data process. In
this 2 minutes, you cannot operate the loaded DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
Recording
To play a DVD-R disc recorded on this recorder on
other devices, finalize the DVD-R disc on this
page 132)
recorder. (
The finalization permanently disables the disc’s
writeability. (Canceling the finalization is not possible.)
• DVD-Video finalize process cannot be canceled if
once executed on a DVD-R disc.
• On DVD-R discs recorded on other devices, you
cannot execute DVD-Video finalize process or add
recordings on this recorder.
• DVD-R discs with the method of ”DVD-Video
Creation” have been alreadly executed the DVDVideo finalize process. Therefore, they cannot be
added the contents.
Programmed recording and operational status
The recorder gives priority to programmed recordings
in every operating mode. Even if the recorder is
playing, recording or editing, or even in standby mode,
at a starting time of a programmed recording the
recorder will make itself ready or stop those
operations and start the recording.
page 122) and
However, “Creating a DVD-Video” (
page 132)
“DVD-Video finalizing process” (
operations may have priority over programmed
recordings.
Introduction
Note on recording on a DVD-R disc
Confirm disc compatibility and prepare an available
page 6, 9).
DVD-R disc to record on (
Others
Notes
• The “Loading” icon appears in the top right of the screen after recording. This indicates that the unit is executing
the final recording process (writing managing information). Operations other than changing channels cannot be
done until this icon disappears. The time for executing this process differs depending on the recording time or
capacity of the disc.
• Note that all recording content may be deleted if the unit is disconnected from a wall outlet, or a power failure
occurs, during recording.
• If a power failure occurs within 5 minutes prior to the programed recording start time, the programmed recording
may not be executed.
• A programmed recording may not be executed correctly if scheduled when Daylight-Saving time starts or ends.
27
Recording
Before recording (Continued)
Initializing a DVD-RAM/RW disc (Logical Format)
Be sure to read this section prior to using a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder for the first time.
For DVD-R, initializing is not necessary.
A disc should be initialized in the following cases: (The
recorder may display a message to request you to do
so.)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
SAP
Exit
e.g.
When you use a DVD-RAM/RW disc on this recorder
for the first time.
If data fragments produced by repeated recording or
erasing have accumulated.
If a disc error has occurred.
When you want to record on a DVD-RAM disc for PC.
page 8)
(
Initializing formats a disc logically and insures that it will
perform to its full capability. However, this erases all data
on the disc, so make sure that it does not matter if data
on the disc is erased whenever you initialize a disc.
3) Press /
ENTER.
Disc information
DVD format
to select “DVD format,” then press
e.g.
DVD format
How to initialize a disc
To initialize a DVD-RAM disc, load it in the recorder.
page 20 for loading a disc.
See
Disc Number
Disc Name
Start
1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.
The following menu appears. (The actual contents
depends on the operational status of the recorder.)
e.g.
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Special playback mode
Disc management
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
SAP
Exit
2) Press / to select “Disc management,” then
press ENTER.
A sub menu appears on the right side.
28
Format
0 0 1 –
Edit
Edit
Cancel
0%
Numbering a disc
The recorder automatically numbers discs when
initializing. However, you can assign a desired number
(using 3 digits) and designate sides A and B on a doublesided disc. (DVD-RW discs cannot be numbered.)
(1) Press the / buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc
Number” then press the ENTER button.
(2) Press the / buttons to select a digit.
(3) Press the / buttons to shift.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3).
(5) Press the ENTER button.
Naming a disc
You can name a disc.
(1) Press the / buttons to select “Edit” of “Disc
Name,” then press the ENTER button.
The character input window appears.
(2) Enter a disc name following the procedure of
page 30).
“Entering characters” (
button to eliminate the window.
(3) Press the
/
to select “Start,” then press ENTER.
Introduction
4) Press
1) During stop, press SETUP.
2) Press / to select “Management settings”
then press ENTER.
e.g.
e.g.
DVD format
Start
Cancel
0%
Format
e.g.
Management settings
Genre setting
Off
Eco. mode
HDD auto stop
Off
All HDD titles delete
HDD format
DVD-RAM physical format
Software version
DVD drive software
SETUP
3) Press / to select “DVD-RAM Physical
Format,” then press ENTER.
4) Press / to select “Yes,” then press ENTER
to execute.
Playback
5) Press / to select “Start,” then press ENTER.
Initialization starts.
Recording
Entire disc contents excluding
library data will be erased
if disc is formatted. Proceed?
DVD format
Yes
Format
18 %
When initialization is completed, the setup window
disappears.
To cancel, select “No”, then press the ENTER
button.
5) Read the message, and press / to select
“Yes” or “No”, then press ENTER.
29
Others
Notes
• The physical format process may fail if executed to a dirty
DVD-RAM disc. Also, the disc may be difficult to record,
even if it finished. Before executing DVD-RAM physical
format process, be sure to confirm the disc is not dirty.
Clean it if necessary. If the disc has scratches or dust
beyond cleaner’s efficacy, do not execute DVD-RAM
physical format process on the disc.
• The following DVD-RAM discs require physical formatting:
– A disc which is not formatted correctly.
– The disc which has errors during writing because of dirt
on the disc, and cannot be further recorded, or cannot
initialize normally.
• You need to start physical formatting from the first step
again when you use a failed disc.
• Physical formatting does not work if the disc contains a lot
of voids beyond the limitation of this recorder.
• If an error occurs in physical formatting, “ERR-01” appears
in the front panel display. To turn off the message, press
the DISPLAY button on the remote control.
Function setup
Physical formatting is a simple execution for a disc which
cannot be used or read (or which is becoming hard to
read). It may refresh such a disc for recording and
playback. (There is no guarantee that all such discs will
be recovered.)
“DVD-RAM logical format” process only rewrites certain
data on file system and management information,
however, “DVD-RAM physical format” rewrites all data on
a disc, therefore it takes a much longer time to complete.
For a 4.7GB single sided DVD-RAM, about 70 minutes
will be necessary. While processing, all recorder
operations and functions including program recording will
not work until the process is finished. Also this process
erases all data stored on the DVD-RAM disc.
No
Library
DVD-RAM physical format
Editing
Warning: It will take approximately
70 minutes to format a 4.7GB
DVD-RAM and all data will be erased.
Confirm that timer programing is not
scheduled. Proceed?
DVD
Formatting
Recording
Before recording (Continued)
Entering characters
Indicates the end of the
first line on the
CONTENT MENU.
e.g.
Cursor
An entered character
will appear here.
CONTENT Title information
MENU
Indicates the limit of
Characters displayable
on the CONTENT
MENU.
The character being
selected appears.
Chapter 003
Language
1
q
a
z
English
Spanish
French
German
Italian
etc...
3
e
d
c
4
r
f
v
5
t
g
b
Space
Select
Cursor
2
w
s
x
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Input
/
,
#
6 78
y u i
h j k
nm,
Space
9
o
l
.
0 - = / ’
p [ ]
:
BkSp
/
Delete
Space
Clear All
DELETE
Direct(0-9)
. ;
CLEAR
BkSp
Caps Lock
Save
All Clear
:
Space
Operation guide
Return
Operation guidance of the remote control
Switching a language
To enter the character, normally use the direction
/ / / buttons on the remote. About the other
buttons to be used are shown on the operation guide.
Before entering a character, move a cursor to the
language selection area by pressing the / buttons.
Then press the / buttons to select a language,
then press the ENTER button.
: Shifts a cursor.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
: Enters the number.
DELETE
: Erases one character immediately to the left
side of the cursor.
CLEAR
: Erases all the characters on the input column.
: Caps Lock
: Saves the changes on the input column and
returns to the previous screen.
: Cancels the changes on the input column and
returns to the previous screen.
: Enters a space.
/
,
#
30
. ;
: Enters a symbol.
Introduction
Entering characters
The cursor may be followed by unwanted characters.
You can erase them if necessary by either of the
following measures:
Erasing characters
Recording
• Erasing all the characters on the writing board
Select “Clear All” by pressing the / / / buttons,
then press the ENTER button.
Alternatively, open the lid of the remote control and
press the CLEAR button.
Playback
• Erasing one character before the cursor
Select “BkSp” by pressing the / / / buttons,
then press the ENTER button.
Alternatively, open the lid of the remote control and
press the DELETE button.
Editing
(1) Press the button to select an input mode.
(2) Press the / / / buttons to select a character,
then press the ENTER button.
The selected character is input on the cursor.
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) to enter characters.
to save the characters.
(4) When finished, press
The characters you entered appears.
Library
Notes
• You can enter up to 64 characters.
• When unnecessary information appears, or when you want
to alter the input character, press the CLEAR button to
erase all, or press the DELETE button to erase an
unnecessary character.
Function setup
Others
31
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Recording a TV program
To record a TV program currently being broadcast, follow the procedures of this chapter.
Preparation
• When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
- Load a disc which has sufficient space available to record the program.
- Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
• If you record on a DVD-R or a DVD-RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” (
R/RW recording, “Off” setting is regarded as “Main.”
• If you record on a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc, set “Aspect Ratio(Video mode)” (
sources.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
page 162) to “Main” or “SAP.” In DVDpage 162) according to recording
Press HDD or DVD to select a media to record
on.
HDD
HDD : To record on the HDD.
DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
DVD
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select a
recording source.
Each time you press the button, the indicator alternates.
ENTER
To record a TV program or cable program with
recorder tuner.
E
/A
DJ
L-1:
To record a source connected to the INPUT1
jacks on the rear panel (
page 37).
L-2:
To record a source connected to the INPUT2
jacks on the front panel (
page 37).
L-3:
To record a source connected to the INPUT3
jacks on the rear panel (
page 37).
L-U:
To record pictures currently played (
116).
SE
AM
Ch-:
AR
FR
CH
INPUT SELECT
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
page
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
To record a program from a connected set top box, set
the channel to “Ch-3”, “Ch-4”, “L-1” or “L-3” according to
page 40 on
the connection (the same as
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
If the connection of the supplied IR control cable and
the necessary settings are all done, you can select
channels of the connected set top box with the
recorder’s remote control.
If not, select the proper channel on the set top box to
receive the desired program.
32
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
Press the number buttons to select a channel
to record.
The CHANNEL buttons (
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
DVD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
/
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
3
OPEN/CLOSE
) are also available.
0
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Playback
4
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick
Menu. (If you want to use the default setting for “AV Record
Quality,” skip to step 8.)
ENTER
E
/A
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
REC
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
QUICK MENU
5
Library
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
Press / to select “AV record quality,” then
press ENTER.
ENTER
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLEAR
SETUP
ENTER
0
+10
6
Press / to select a media to be recorded,
then press ADJUST to select the setting
number.
e.g.
ENTER
Open the lid.
AV record quality
FR
AM
E
DJ
US
T
DVD
SP
Rate
6.6
4.6
–––
4.6 D/M1
Audio quality
L-PCM
D/M1
3
LP
2.2
D/M1
4
Manual
6.0
D/M2
Others
HDD Setting 1
Manual 6.6 L-PCM
Custom setting
Mode
Setting
1
Manual
2
SP
5
/A
Function setup
DELETE
Manual
3.2
D/M1
Total recording time: 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
SETUP
See
page 41 for details on “Mode”, “Rate” and
“Audio Quality”.
(Continued)
33
Recording
Recording a TV program (Continued)
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
The menu disappears.
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
SK
W
O
ENTER
IP
SL
7
Press ENTER.
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
RE
T
PAUSE
STOP
TU
PI C
PLAY
8
Press REC.
Recording starts.
REC
REC
QUICK MENU
Selecting the recording mode
Before recording, you can select the setting of picture and sound quality. During stop mode, press the REC MODE
button. By pressing the button repeatedly, you can select one from 5 settings of “AV record quality” appearing in
the front panel display.
Notes
• During recording, you cannot change the recording parameters, such as modes, channels, etc.
• The number of titles cannot exceed 99 for a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc or 396 for the HDD.
• One continuous recording cannot exceed in any case 9 hours. Recording automatically stops at 9 hours.
• During normal recording, you can set the programmed recording using the REC MENU.
• You cannot start recording immediately before a programmed recording starts.
• For recorded sound, see
page 74.
• During monaural sound recording, the same sound is recorded on both the left and right channels.
• When “Audio” is set to “L-PCM”, multi-channel sound is recorded as stereo sound. When playing this recorded sound, you
will hear MAIN and SAP sounds simultaneously. Press the AUDIO button to select a desired sound.
• When “DVD compatible mode” is set to “Main” or “SAP”, the unit records the same sounds on both the left and right
channels when receiving monaural sound. When receiving the multi-channel sound, the selected sound, Main or SAP, is
recorded on both the left and right channels.
• Depending on the disc contents, pressing the REC button may take a longer time to start recording.
• When a starting time of a programmed recording comes, a recording in execution is stopped and the programmed recording
starts. If you do not want to stop the recording, cancel the timer program before it starts.
• Even if you set “Aspect ratio(Video mode)” (
page 162) to “16:9”, images are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio when using a
DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with “Rate” set to “1.4” (Mbps).
• Be careful of a programmed recording across the change-over of Daylight-saving time (
page 27).
34
Introduction
To stop recording
To record and play at the same time
Press STOP.
During recording, press PAUSE.
To resume recording, press it again.
Note
• During a dubbing job, the unoccupied drive is available for
recording or playback, however, cannot perform a function
which records and plays simultaneously.
To set an end time of a recording which is in
progress
1) During recording, press PAUSE.
Recording pauses.
1) During recording, press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press CHANNEL to change the channel.
2) Press / to select “End time” then press
ENTER .
The display changes as follows:
3) Press PAUSE to resume recording.
Editing
To change a TV channel to be recorded
Playback
Note
• Pausing recording automatically creates a new chapter
division at that point.
Recording
To pause recording (to omit an unnecessary
portion)
To start recording while playing a disc
Stop playback, then select the other disc by
pressing the HDD or DVD button, and start
recording on that disc.
To play a disc while recording on another disc
Select the disc that is not being recorded by
pressing the HDD or DVD button, and start
playback on the disc.
e.g.
To view a TV program while recording another
End time
2 :13 pm
Library
1) Start recording on this recorder.
2) On a connected TV, select the TV mode.
3) Using the channel selector of the TV, select a
desired channel on the TV.
3) Press / to select an item then press
ADJUST to change the value.
4) Press ENTER.
Before recording, set “Rec DNR” (
page 162).
Notes
• By setting an end time, it is memorized as a programmed
one, and the
indicator in the front panel display
illuminates to indicate that t he recorder holds a timer
program of recording.
• The programmed end time must be set for 5 minutes later
than the current time.
Function setup
To reduce noise on recordings (Rec DNR)
Others
35
Recording
Recording a TV program (Continued)
To play a recorded title while recording another
on the same disc (Recorded Title Play)
HDD
DVD-RAM
During recording, you can play a title recorded on the
same disc.
1) While recording, press CONTENT MENU.
2) Press / / / to select a desired title, then
press the ENTER.
Playback of the selected title starts.
Pressing the STOP button stops playback, and the
content currently recorded returns. If you press the
PLAY button, playback resumes from the location
you last stopped.
Notes
• The playback picture may appear after a delay of several
seconds.
• While you are using this function, the following operations/
functions are not available.
- Programmed playback (repeat playback, intro scan etc.)
- Editing (Playlist programming, dubbing, title/chapter
naming, title thumbnail setting, etc.)
• This function is not available at a 10 minutes overlapped
portion of the relay recording or A-B recording (
page
48).
• Depending on the data condition, playback may pause.
• During a dubbing job, this function is not available.
When recording contents which will be copied
to a DVD-RW/R disc later on
Before recording, set “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) to “On”.
Each timer program must to be set its “DVD
compatible mode” from the Quick Menu.
36
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Recording an external source
Introduction
You can record programs from connected equipment on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
Connect according to A or B.
A: Using the input jacks on the rear of the recorder
Video cable
INPUT3 (L-3)
• To record a clearer picture,
use the S video jack.
To video
output jack
Recording
INPUT1 (L-1)
Audio cable
To audio
output jack
White
Red
Rear of the
recorder
Yellow
External equipment
Y
L
INPUT1
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
BITSTREAM/PCM
VIDEO
R
RF OUT
(TO TV)
VHF / UHF
To video
output jack
PR
PB
COMPONENT
R
S-VIDE
L
O
INPUT3
CHANNEL
CHANGE
O
IR
R
L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
VIDEO
Playback
RF IN
(FROM ANT.)
S-VIDEO
To audio
output jacks
B: Using the input jacks on the front of the recorder
Editing
Audio cable
Video cable
Yellow
White
Red
Library
For recording from a digital video
camera recorder, etc. connected to
the DV input terminal on the front
page 136, “DV
panel, see
recording.”
INPUT 2 (L-2)
Function setup
Preparation
• When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
– Load a disc which has sufficient remaining space to record the program.
– Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
(Continued)
37
Others
Notes
• Even if a source of high quality sound track such as DVD audio is recorded with this recorder, the sound quality becomes
regular audio CD’s one. Refer to the instructions of the connected equipment.
• When you record an external source onto a DVD-R/RW disc or a contents which will be copied to a DVD/R/RW disc later on,
set the connected equipment to output sound you want to record (if selectable such as multiplex broadcasting), as the
recorder records sounds of external source in the stereo type onto a DVD-R/RW disc, neglecting the setting of “DVD
compatible mode” (
page 162).
• DVD-R/RW discs cannot record contents with copy restriction signal embedded (copy-protected or copy once contents),
DVD-RAM discs can record copy once contents.
• Some satellite programs via a connected tuner may contain both 4:3 pictures and 16:9 pictures. DVD-R/RW discs cannot
record such contents, under restriction of DVD-Video standard. To record them, use the HDD or DVD-RAM discs.
Recording
Recording an external source (Continued)
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly so that “L-1,”
“L-2,” or “L-3” appears on the front panel
display, corresponding to the input in which
the device is connected.
INPUT SELECT
DVD
Each time you press the button, the indicator changes.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
L-1: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the INPUT 1 jacks on the rear panel.
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
L-2: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the INPUT2 jacks on the front panel.
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
L-3: To record pictures from equipment connected to
the INPUT3 jacks on the rear panel.
ENTER
CH
L-U: To record pictures currently played (
page 116).
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
US
RE
T
PAUSE
STOP
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
2
Press HDD or DVD to select a recording
media.
HDD
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
HDD : To record on the HDD.
DVD : To record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc.
DVD
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
3
4
Start playback of the source content on the
connected equipment.
Press REC of this recorder to start recording.
REC
5
When recording is completed, press STOP.
STOP
38
Introduction
Notes on recording from a connected VCR or camcorder
Editing
When recording from a camcorder
Follow the above notes. Be sure to power the camcorder by its AC adapter, not batteries. If batteries are used,
the recording may be finished on the way.
Playback
Do not operate the source equipment during recording on this recorder.
Operations such as pausing, resuming, fast-forwarding (CUE) and fast-reversing (REVIEW), etc. may produce
noises, which may be detected as copy protection signals. Therefore, first start playback on the source
equipment to confirm that the desired source can be played properly, and then start recording on this recorder.
Do not operate the source equipment during recording. After completing the desired scene, stop the recording on
the recorder, and then stop the playback on the source equipment. Delete unnecessary scenes using editing
page 118). If you want to operate the source equipment during recording, pause or stop the
functions (
recording. After operating the source equipment, resume the recording as above.
Recording
Check the condition of the source equipment before playing.
Set the equipment in good condition, e.g. clean the head or adjust the tracking, etc. to obtain optimum playback.
Bad condition may produce noises in playback. These noises may be detected as copy protection signals,
resulting in stop of recording on this recorder.
Play a source in an usual mode. Avoid using any correcting or enhancing features, as they may add signals
which can be detected as copy protection signals.
Source quality or tape condition beyond adjustments on the source equipment may stop a recording on this
recorder.
Library
Function setup
Others
39
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Programing a recording (REC MENU)
Use the REC MENU to program a recording. It will take less time to prepare, as it provides all necessary
information for recording, including estimated disc space remaining.
page 26).
For more information, see “Before recording” (
page 27).
Be careful when you program a recording across the change-over of Daylight-saving time (
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
CHANNEL
During stop, press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
REC MENU
e.g. REC
MENU Timer Programing
Exec CH
HDD
TIMESLIP
Date
Start
End
1/ 1
Media
4/3 (Sa) 9:00 pm
Video Audio Disc
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - am - - - - - am HDD SP 4.6
DVD
D/M1
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press ENTER.
“CH” is ready for setting.
e.g. REC
Timer Programing
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
Exec CH
Date
Start
End
1/ 1
Media
4/3 (Sa) 9:00 pm
Video Audio Disc
D/M1
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
--- ------- -- -- am -- -- am HDD SP 4.6
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
REC
3
Select an item by pressing / , then press
ADJUST ( / ) to set the item.
e.g. REC
MENU Timer Programing
Exec CH
ENTER
Date
Start
End
1/ 1
Media
4/3 (Sa) 9:00 pm
Video Audio Disc
23 4/10 (Sa) 7 00 pm 8 00 pm DVD SP 4.6
D/M1
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
• Refer to the setting items on the next page.
• You can also set the item by pressing the /
• “CH” can be input by the number buttons.
T.SEARCH
2
3
FR
1
5
/A
E
4
AM
CLEAR
6
DJ
US
buttons.
T
DELETE
7
8
SETUP
9
ENTER
0
+10
4
When complete, press ENTER.
ENTER
Open the lid.
5
Press REC MENU to exit.
REC MENU
CLEAR
40
To programme another recording, press the button to
move to the top of the next line, then repeat steps 2 to
4.
Your programme is entered.
• If you want to turn off the power, press the power
button.
Setting items
Exec
Date
A timer program with this mark will be executed, To disengage, remove
this indicator.
2-69 (TV), 1-125 (Cable),
0-999 (When “IR control”**is
“On”), L1-L3
Select a channel you want to record.
(While “L1” - “L3” is selected, the number buttons are not available to
select channels.)
Specified date (from today to 2
month later)
Every Sunday to Saturday, Monday
to Thursday, Monday to Friday,
Monday to Saturday, everyday.
Select a date of a TV program you want to record.
Enter a starting time of recording. (An initial setting is 10 minutes later.)
You can also use the number buttons under the lid.
End*
12:00 am - 11:59 pm
Enter an end time. (Set the timer to begin recording no sooner than 2
minutes past the current time. Recording must not exceed 9 hours.)
You can also use the number buttons under the lid.
DVD
When you record on a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc.
HDD
When you record on the HDD.
A–B
When you use A – B (double-side) recording (
automatically set to “AT”.
SP
Standard setting of recording time and picture quality. (Not applicable
when “L-PCM” is selected.)
LP
For longer recording, but inferior to “SP” in picture quality. (Not
applicable when “L-PCM” is selected.)
MN(Manual)
Customized setting of rate (bit rate).
AT (Auto)
To set a rate automatically according to the remaining volume of the
disc. (If the disc does not have room for the TV programme, the
programme cannot be recorded to the end.)
When you select an HDD, the recorder records for a length of time
corresponding to that of a blank DVD-RAM disc (4.7GB). Not
applicable to a recording for 2.5 hours or longer.
1.4, 2.0-9.2
Not applicable when “SP”, “LP” or “Auto” is selected. You can set a
rate at intervals of 0.2Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (The upper limit of the
value depends on the “Audio” setting.)
Media
Audio
D /M1 ***
Standard setting.
D /M2 ***
Superior to
L-PCM
D/M1.Recommended for recording music programs.
Uncompressed original digital audio. Equal quality to audio CD, but
recordable time will be shorter.
A programmed recording onto a Reservation Disc is marked with an
icon.
Suggestions for the picture quality setting
• For normal recording or when you cannot decide which mode to choose.
Select “SP”.
• When you need a longer recording time and video quality is not important
Select “LP”. Inferior to “SP” in picture quality, but it can record longer.
• To record a high picture quality
Select “MN (Manual)” to set a desired bit rate. The higher the bit rate, better the picture quality is, but shorter the
recording length becomes. We recommend that you set about 6.0 Mbps to 6.8 Mbps.
• To fill the disc
Select “AT (Auto)”. A bit rate is calculated automatically according to the remaining volume of the disc. Some
contents may not be recorded on the disc even if you select this function. This is not the function to make full use
of the remaining space capacity.
(Continued)
41
Others
* If you set summer time on the clock of the recorder, see the notes on
page 32 in the “INSTALLATION GUIDE”.
** See
page 37 in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”.
*** The digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used for
D/M1 and
D/M2. Dolby
Digital 192 kbps is set for
D/M1 and Dolby Digital 384 kbps for
D/M2.
Notes
page 51, 161 for details on “Mode”, “Video”, and “Audio”.
• See
• If you record with setting the bit rate to about 4.0 Mbps or below, the recorded pictures may not be played properly if change
the playback speed. There will be noise, and the picture quality is lower than other rate settings.
Function setup
Disc
Library
(Bit Rate)
page 48). “Video” is
Editing
Video
Playback
12:00 am - 11:59 pm
Recording
Start*
Introduction
CH
√
Recording
Programming a recording (REC MENU) (Continued)
Notes
• The disc tray does not close automatically, even when the recording start time arrives. Set the recorder loaded an available
DVD-RAM/R/RW disc beforehand.
• It it not possible to record the same contents onto both the HDD and a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc simultaneously.
• When there is little time before a programmed recording starts, you may not be able to start another recording.
• Playback of the DVD drive pauses when a programmed recording onto the HDD starts.
• Do not change the “TV/Cable” selection of the Initial settings while a recording is programmed. If you want to change it,
cancel the program recording. After then, make the programing again if necessary.
• Confirm the “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) setting. “Main” or “SAP” records main sound or sub-sound of multiplex
broadcasts respectively, and does not record the other. Therefore, select “Main” or “SAP” only when you record onto a DVDR/RW disc.
• When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) to the desired recording sound for each
timer program.
Setting the details for every timer program
You can specify detail items for each of your timer
program.
page 40.
1) Press QUICK MENU at step 3 on
The Quick Menu is displayed.
e.g. REC
MENU Timer Programing
Quick Menu
Start
Exec CH Date
End
1/ 1
Media
4/3 (Sa) 9:00 pm
Video Audio Disc
AV record quality
23 4/10 (Sa) 7 00 pm 8 00 pm DVD SP 4.6
Edit title name
D/M1
High rate save
Use this feature when you want to save space
while using the best picture quality rate for
recording. This will use 9.2 Mbps for recording and
reduce the rate temporarily for the portion where
the high rate is not required where picture is fairly
constant.
Off : This feature is disabled and the normal
recording is performed.
On : This feature is enabled.
DVD compatible mode
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-R
Broadcast
Record
High
rate save
AV Record
Quality
Chap. mute
Genre setting
Exit
2) Press
/
to select an item and press ENTER.
AV record quality
Select an item from registered selections (1-5) for
the picture and audio quality.
Edit title name
Enter a name for the timer program.
Use the input screen to enter a name (
30).
page
DVD compatible mode
When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc or
recording a content which will be copied to a DVD/
page 162) for each
R/RW, make this selection (
timer program.
“Off” setting is neglected and regarded as “Main” in
DVD-R/RW recording.
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
Select the aspect ratio when recording onto a DVDpage 162)
R/RW disc. (
42
Notes
• When the audio quality is set to “L-PCM”, the picture
quality is set to “Manual 8.0 Mbps”. When the audio
quality is set to any other selection, the picture
quality is set to “Manual 9.2 Mbps”.
• While this is set to “On,” you cannot change the
mode or rate.
• The space used may not change, depending on the
picture contents.
Chap. mute
This feature automatically creates divisions for
chapters when no audio (no audible sound) portion
is found.
For example, when you have recorded a program
of music clips, you can use this feature to jump to
the beginning of a clip during playback. It does not
create completely independent chapters or
automatically divide into chapters when no audio
portion is found.
Off : This feature is disabled.
On : Division for chapters when no audio portion is
found.
Notes
• Divisions for chapters may not be created,
depending on the contents of the program or the
condition of no audio portion, or it may be created at
different positions. A division for a chapter may be
created within a music clip.
• Depending on the specification made for the
recording sound level, a division for a chapter may
not be created or it may be created at different
positions.
3) Press / to select the item, then press
ADJUST to set the item.
4) When complete, press ENTER.
5) Press REC MENU to exit.
Note
• While the recorder is preparing for or executing a
programmed recording, you cannot add a timer program
which will start within 5 minutes and 15 seconds from the
current time.
Deleting a timer program
1:00pm
1:54pm
4) Press / to select “Program cancel”, then
press ENTER.
Check the message, then delete the entry.
5) Press REC MENU to exit.
Note
• You cannot delete a timer program while another is
executed.
Time Shift
Library
20 minutes
extend
1:20pm
3) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Editing
If a prior TV program extends beyond its scheduled
time and into one that you programmed, you can shift
the programmed start and end time of the recording.
to select a timer program you want
Playback
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
2) Press /
to delete.
Shifting a time period of a recording (Time
Shift)
Recording
Genre setting
You can set a genre before setting programmed
recording.
To see the registered list, refer to Genre setting
page 163).
(
Set the genre according to recording contents.
The selection you have made for the timer program
is shown at the bottom of the display.
2) Press to select a blank line, then press
ENTER.
Introduction
• Setting “On” may create many chapters, and their
number may reach the maximum allowed. At that
point, no more chapters can be created. In this case,
decrease the chapters, for example by combining
page 95).
chapters (
• This feature is not available on DVD-R/RW discs. To
create chapters automatically during recording on
DVD-R/RW discs, set “DVD-Video:CHP create.” (
page 162).
2:14pm
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
3) Open the lid of the remote control and press
EXTEND.
“Start time” and “End tme” are ready to be input.
4) Press EXTEND repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, “Start time” and
“End time” is shifted in 10 minutes intervals to, up
to 60 minutes later.
6) Press REC MENU to exit.
Note
• After you shifted the time of a timer program which will be
repeated daily or weekly, you should restore the original
start/stop time for future recordings.
2) Press / to select a timer program you want
to change, then press ENTER.
3) Press / to select an item, then press
ADJUST to set the item.
4) Press ENTER.
The modification is registered.
5) Press REC MENU to exit.
Important
• You cannot correct a timer program within 5 minutes before
the recording start time. You can only delete the timer
program.
Note
• You can program a timer recording whose start time has
already passed, unless the another program recording will
start within 5 minutes. The portion of the program before
the recording starts cannot be saved.
Adding a timer program
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
43
Others
5) Press ENTER.
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
Function setup
2) Press / to select a timer program you want
to shift the time period.
Correcting a timer program
Recording
Programming a recording (REC MENU) (Continued)
Elapsed programing (using past data for
programing)
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / to select “Elapsed programing”,
then press ENTER.
The “Elapsed programing” list appears.
4) Press /
ENTER.
to select a program, then press
5) Press / to select an item to correct, then
press ADJUST to change the value.
6) When complete, press ENTER.
7) Press REC MENU to exit.
Note
• Up to 36 past programs are saved. Additinn of a new one
deletes the oldest one.
Remaining volume
1) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / to select “Disc budget calculation”
then press ENTER.
The Disc budget calculation menu appears.
4) Press / to select a timer program, then
press ENTER or press ADJUST.
The recorder calculates on a bar graph how much
a specific program (identified by a check mark) will
occupy on the disc.
Pressing the ADJUST button can display or remove
the check mark.
e.g. REC
MENU Disc budget calculation
Elapsed programing (using past data for
programing)
CH
Date
3
10
42
4
4/10 (Sa)
4/13 (Tu)
4/16 (Fr)
4/16 (Fr)
Start
11: 30
9 : 30
10: 30
8 : 30
End
pm– 11: 50 pm
pm–10 : 00 pm
pm–11 : 30 pm
pm–11 : 30 pm
4/3 (Sa) 9:00 pm
Media
HDD
DVD
HDD
DVD
Video Audio Result
MN
MN
LP
SP
6.6
6.6
2.2
4.6
D/M2
D/M2
D/M1
D/M2
1) On the REC MENU, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select “Elapsed programing”,
then press ENTER.
The “Elapsed programing” list appears.
3) Press
/
to select a program to delete.
4) Press QUICK MENU, then / to select
“Elapsed programing delete”, and press
ENTER.
The selected data is deleted.
If you want to delete all data at once, select “All
elapsed programing delete”.
HDD
Elapsed
(
) Selected(current)
Available
DVD
Selected program
Available disc space
When the entry item is marked X, the
recording does not fit. Change the setting.
5) Correct the parameters of the timer program if
necessary.
(Skip to step 7 if you do not need this.)
You can change “Media”, “Video” and “Audio”.
Select an item you want to modify and press the
ENTER button. The item will be ready to be altered.
Press the ADJUST button to modify. When
complete, press the ENTER button.
You can adjust to a lower mode (SP to LP) and/or
lower the rate to reduce the quality of the recording,
and thus provide more disc capacity (space).
6) Press .
Program modification is registered.
7) Press REC MENU to exit the GUI.
44
While a programmed recording has started, open
the lid of the remote control and press EXTEND.
The first press displays the programmed end time (in
the front panel display).
Each time you press the button, it is delayed 10
minutes, up to 60 minutes.
Notes
• Pressing a button except EXTEND in the above procedure
will set the currently selected delay.
• You cannot delay the end time of a programmed recording
which will end within 1 minute from the current time.
• Even if you delay the end time of a programmed recording,
the recording will stop when the disc is exhausted. Also it
will stop if 9 hours elapsed.
Playback
Editing
To finish,
Press on the front panel twice.
When you press it once, a message appears. While
the message is displayed, press the button once
again.
Delaying the end time of a programmed
recording while it is recording
Recording
To stop a programmed recording
Introduction
Notes
• When a Reservation disc (
page 49) is inserted in the
recorder, you cannot check the remaining volume of other
discs.
• The nearest 8 programs are calculated at a time.
• While the recorder is preparing for or executing a
programmed recording, any program modification cannot
be registered. Only programs which will start after 5
minutes or later can be modified.
• Available disc volume is not displayed for a DVD-R/RW
disc on which DVD-Video finalize process was executed.
To pause recording,
Press on the front panel.
To resume recording, press it again.
Library
Turning the power off automatically after
completing a programmed recording
1) While executing a programmed recording, press
QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Function setup
2) Press / to select “Auto power off” then
press ENTER.
Keeping the power on even after the
programmed recording finished
Others
If the recorder turns itself on to execute a programmed
recording, it will turn itself off after finishing the
recording. You can restrict this and keep the recorder
powered on.
1) While executing a programmed recording, press
QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select “Continuous power on”
then press ENTER.
45
Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
VCR Plus+ Recording
You can program a recording simply by entering the corresponding PlusCode® numbers.
Preparation
• Make sure that “Time & date setting”, “Channel setting” and “Guide channel setting” are set correctly (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
• When you record on a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc, load it into the recorder.
– Load a disc which has space available to record the program.
– Make sure the loaded disc is not write-protected.
page 28,
For cable box or satellite receiver users:
• Finish the set top box setting (
page 36, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”), and turn on the cable box or satellite receiver.
e.g.
5PM FAM POPEYE Cartoon 725692
HBO MAKING OF A CHAMPION 237945
A look at gymnast and Olympic hopeful Kim
Zmeskal from novice to seasoned competitor.
N I K HEY DUDE
Children
PlusCode®
number
793571
One of Ted’s teachers stays at the ranch.
USA MY TWO DADS Comedy 586858
5:35 TBS GOOD TIMES Comedy 2261858
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
1
The “REC MENU Timer Programing” with the PlusCode
input window appears.
VCR Plus+
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Open the lid of the remote control, and press
VCR Plus+.
e.g. REC
Timer Programing
MENU
Exec CH
End
1/ 1
Media
D/M2
D/M2
D/M1
CH
E
SE
AM
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
REC
2
Press the appropriate number buttons to enter
the PlusCode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
0
T.SEARCH
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Refer to newspapers or TV magazines to obtain
PlusCodes.
• To correct entered digits, press the CLEAR button to
erase them and press the number buttons to re-enter
again.
Note
• When you enter the number starting from 0, a 9-digit
number is entered.
3
CLEAR
DELETE
SETUP
ENTER
0
+10
3
Press ENTER.
The entered program is highlighted.
ENTER
Open the lid.
CLEAR
46
4/3 (Sa) 9:00 pm
Video Audio Disc
VCR PLUS+
PLUS CODE: – – – – – – – – –
AR
FR
DJ
Start
3 4/10 (Sa) 11 30 pm - 11: 50 pm HDD MN 6.6
10 4/13 (Tu) 9 : 30 pm -10 : 00 pm DVD MN 6.6
- - - - - - - - - - - : - - am - - - : - - am HDD SP 4.6
ENTER
/A
Date
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Select an item by pressing / , then press
ADJUST ( / ) to set the item, if necessary.
For details about items, see
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
REC MENU EDIT MENU
FR
E
/A
W
O
US
T
5
Press ENTER.
E
/A
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
Playback
DJ
SK
IP
SL
AM
CONTENT MENU
page 40.
Recording channels and “IR control” setting (
page 37, INSTALLATION GUIDE):
When set to “Off”, make sure “CH” shows the channel
you want to record.
When set to “On”, select a channel on the set top box
connected to the input you selected, and keep the set
top box powered on.
DVD
EASY
NAVI
LIBRARY
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
ENTER
QUICK MENU
REC
REC
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLEAR
Library
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
6
7
To enter another program, repeat steps 1 to 5.
After completing all your entries, press REC
MENU.
The REC MENU disappears.
7
8
SETUP
9
ENTER
0
+10
REC MENU
Function setup
DELETE
To confirm your data, it is recommended to turn on the
REC MENU again.
47
Others
Notes
• The maximum timer program capacity is 32. Any new program will be rejected if the recorder is full. To enter a new program,
you must cancel an existing one (
page 43).
• Depending on the program, an actual recording may continue a few minutes longer than programmed.
• Entries made under the following conditions will be rejected.
– when an entry is for a non existing program.
– when the digit order of an entry is in error.
– when the guide channel has not yet been set.
• To erase a timer program, press the QUICK MENU button to display a Quick Menu on the REC MENU. For details, see
“Deleting a timer program” (
page 43).
• When recording onto a DVD-R/RW disc, set “DVD compatible mode” (
page 42) to the desired recording sound for each
timer program.
• In the event of a broadcast delay, the next program starts even if when the start time arrives prior to the end of the previous
program.
Recording
Others
Relay Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM
This function automatically diverts a recording to the
HDD if a DVD-RAM disc is near capacity.
When the remaining time of the DVD-RAM disc has
reached about 10 minutes, the recorder starts
recording the same content on the HDD as well as
DVD-RAM. The chapter marks are automatically made
at the start and end points of the overlapped recording
portion. You can delete the unnecessary overlapped
portion afterwards by referring to the chapter marks.
Recording end
DVD-RAM disc
10min.
HDD
Recording start
To engage the Relay Recording function, set “Relay
page 163).
recording” to “On” (
Notes
• When the capacity of the HDD is not sufficient, the
operation is canceled.
• While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot pause
the recording.
• While recording the overlapped portion, you cannot play a
recorded title on the same disc.
• When another programmed recording is set just after the
relay recording, the relay recording stops about 2 minutes
before the next programmed recording starts.
A–B Recording
HDD
DVD-RAM
This function records one programme at the highest
possible rate onto a double sided DVD-RAM disc
(9.4GB) or 2 single sided DVD-RAM discs (4.7GB).
You can record a long programme with a clearer
picture on a DVD-RAM disc.
The A–B recording function records the first half of the
programme on the DVD-RAM disc and second half of
the programme on the HDD. After the recording, copy
the second half recorded on the HDD to the DVDRAM disc. You can create a DVD-RAM library that has
each half of a programme recorded at the highest
possible quality.
Notes
• For A–B recording, use a 12 cm DVD-RAM disc (4.7GB
single sided or 9.4GB double sided) that is formatted on
this unit just before recording. Do not use an 8-cm disc.
Check that the total available space of the HDD is sufficient
for the recording one DVD-RAM disc.
• DVD-RW/R discs are not available on the A-B recording.
48
To use the A–B recording function
page 40), set “Media” to “A–B”. “Video”
At step 3 (
is automatically set to “AT”.
When the timer setting is completed, “
on the front panel display.
” illuminates
When recording starts
The same content is recorded on the HDD and the
DVD-RAM disc 10 minutes before the unit exchanges
the recording media.
Chapter marks are automatically made at the start and
end points of the overlapped recording portion, so you
can delete the unnecessary overlapped portion
afterwards.
If no DVD-RAM disc is loaded, or the loaded disc
contains recorded content, all of the recording is made
entirely on the HDD. The recording will contain one
title with a chapter mark at a dividing point.
During A–B recording, the picture quality mode is set
to “AT” and the unit automatically calculates the
picture rate from the disc capacity. Even if the picture
rate is set to “AT”, the picture quality of the A–B
recording is lower than that of the recording on the
HDD, because the unit adds 10 minutes of the
overlapped portion to the recording time for capacity
calculation. Therefore, the picture rate will remain
when the unit cannot record onto a DVD-RAM disc
and records on the HDD instead.
After recording
Copy the second half of the programme recorded on
the HDD to the alternate side of the double sided
DVD-RAM disc, or another single sided DVD-RAM
page 106 for dubbing operations. When
disc. See
you want to delete the overlapped portion, perform the
page 50 to delete the
procedure detailed on
overlapped portion either on the HDD or the DVDRAM disc.
If the entire programme has been recorded on the
HDD, copy both parts of programme onto both sides
of a blank double sided DVD-RAM disc or two single
sided DVD-RAM discs by referring to the chapter mark
at the dividing point.
To stop the Reservation Disc recording
Press the STOP button on the front panel once. The
message appears.
While it is displayed, press the STOP button again.
Recording stops.
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc.
If the start time of a programmed recording of a
Reservation Disc comes while recording
2) Press REC MENU.
The REC MENU appears.
4) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Not recorded.
10:00
(Start)
11:00
(End)
HDD
10:44:45
Reservation Disc
10:45:00
(Start)
11:55
(End)
Others
To cancel the Reservation Disc setting
Load the disc you want to cancel and select the
recording option on the REC MENU. Press the QUICK
MENU button to select “Unlock program record” then
“Yes”, and press the ENTER button.
Function setup
5) Press / to select “Lock program record” then
“Yes” and press ENTER.
After the recording data is entered, a Reservation
disc icon appears on the REC MENU.
If the Reservation Disc is not loaded, the entry data
and icon are displayed in gray.
e.g. When a start time of a programmed recording of a
Reservation Disc comes during recording on the HDD:
Library
3) Press / to select the program you want to
record.
Make sure that “Media” shows “DVD”.
A recording start time has priority. The current
recording stops about 15 seconds before the start
time, and a recording of a Reservation Disc starts on
time.
Editing
As an example, if you create a Reservation Disc for a
serial broadcast from 9 pm to 10 pm on Monday, then
you can use that disc only for that program. When you
attempt to make a reservation or record that serial, the
recorder will ask you to insert that Reservation Disc.
Playback
If you schedule a date for programmed recording on
the Reservation Disc, the recording information is
automatically deleted after the programmed recording
is completed.
Recording
Once a Reservation Disc is created, you cannot use
other discs to record the same serial program. The
Reservation Disc can be used only for recording a
program reserved for the Reservation Disc.
DVD-RAM
This function is convenient when you wish to record
multiple serial related programs on the same disc.
Introduction
The disc on which you write the reservation data is
called “Reservation Disc.” A Reservation Disc may
contain only one reservation.
To delete the information of a Reservation Disc
If you lose a Reservation Disc, delete the information
of the Reservation Disc.
Press the QUICK MENU button to select the program
of which data you want to delete, and press the
QUICK MENU button. Select “Program record unlock”
and then “Unlock selected program.”
If no programmed recording is set on the loaded disc,
press the QUICK MENU button to select “Program
record unlock” and then “Unlock prog. rec. disc”.
Reservation Disc (“Lock program record”)
49
To delete recorded content
HDD
To protect recorded content
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Important note
Any deleted title/chapter (original) cannot be restored.
Before deleting, be sure to check contents on the disc.
ENTER
/ / /
DVD-RAM
You can protect recorded content from unexpected
deletion.
Protection is provided for each title (original).
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Playing recorded
page 55) to
contents (CONTENT MENU)” (
select a title.
2) Press the QUICK MENU button, and press the
/ buttons to select “Title information”. Then
press the ENTER button.
3) Press the QUICK MENU button, and press the
/ buttons to select “Lock” and then press
the ENTER button.
The mark appears.
DELETE
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Playing recorded
page 55) to
contents (CONTENT MENU)” (
select a title (chapter).
2) Open the lid of the remote control and press the
DELETE button.
Alternate method:
Press the QUICK MENU button, then press the
/ buttons to select “Title delete” (“Chapter
delete”) and press the ENTER button.
3) Read the message and press the / buttons
to select “Yes,” then press the ENTER button.
Notes
• Deleting a title (a chapter) decreases the numbers of the
succeeding titles (chapters).
• A chapter of about 5 seconds or shorter may not be
deleted. Deleting a short chapter may not change the
display of the available disc volume.
• Deleting a playlist (
page 87) title/chapter does not
affect the original title/chapter.
• Deleting an original (
page 87) title/chapter affects all
the corresponding playlist title/chapters.
• Deleting all chapters in a title erases the title itself.
• Title and chapter which contains still pictures cannot be
deleted.
• On a DVD-R/RW disc, deleting is not possible if the disc is
page 132).
finalized (
• Chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc cannot be deleted.
• On a DVD-RW disc, only a title last recorded can restore
the disc capacity by being deleted.
• On a DVD-R disc, deleting cannot restore the disc capacity.
50
Notes
• To cancel protection, repeat this procedure.
• Disc initialization erases all titles on a disc even if they are
protected.
• Executing “All HDD titles delete”(
page 164) erases all
titles on the HDD even if they are protected.
About recording time
Editing
Library
L-PCM (Linear PCM)
Sound recording format, like Dolby Digital. However,
sounds are converted into digital signals and recorded
as they are without compression. This process
requires more data than Dolby Digital.
Function setup
Others
The higher you set the bite rate, the more the volume
of information for the picture. The lower the bit rate,
the less the volume of picture information.
However a high bit rate does not always mean that the
picture quality is high. The difference between the 1.4
Mbps and 9.2 Mbps is obvious, but when comparing
similar bit rates, the difference may be insignificant.
Generally when you set the bit rate low for longer
recording time, the data volume shortage will result in
a lack of detail information. As a result, the picture
quality is decreased (more noticeable with dynamically
moving images). For example, square noises (block
noise) may occur in a scene with fast action or a
scene with light and shadows, such as a water
surface.
This recorder has a two settings, 2 hour recording at
“SP” mode or 4 hour recording at “LP” mode (both
assume a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM). It is
recommended to consider the “SP” mode as a
standard mode and use the “LP” mode when you want
to record for long time regardless of the picture quality.
If you want to record for about 2 hours or are uncertain
which one to select, select the “AT” mode.
D /M2
Playback
About picture quality (SP, LP, Auto, Manual mode)
D /M1,
Sound recording format onto DVD-RAM discs. When
recording, sounds are converted into digital signals
and compressed. In playback, they are extracted to
D/
the original sound. The standard differenciates
D /M2 in data volume to use.
D /M1
M1 and
D /M2 are applied the digital recording
and
technology for consumer products of Dolby
D/
Laboratories. Dolby Digital 192 kbps is set for
D /M2.
M1 and Dolby Digital 384 kbps for
Recording
The recording time of a typical VCR (Video Cassette
Recorder) is determined by the length of a video tape
and recording speed (SP, LP, etc.). Video tapes with
various recording times are available in the market.
On the other hand, the recording time of a DVD-RAM/
R/RW depends on the bit rate (Mbps: amount of data
transmitted per second), which can be varied in
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group2)
compression technology.
As an example, when you pour water into a bucket
from a faucet, the faster the water flows, the sooner
the bucket is filled with water. On the other hand, the
slower the water flows, the more slowly the bucket is
filled. The DVD-RAM/R/RW is, so to speak, such a
bucket, and the degree you turn the faucet is bit rate,
the time required to fill the bucket with water is the
recording time available for a disc. The higher you set
the bit rate (making much more water flow), the
sooner a disc is filled. Consequently, the recording
time becomes shorter. The lower you set the bit rate,
the longer time it takes to fill a disc.
On a blank 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc, the “Auto” mode
automatically sets the appropriate bit rate
corresponded to the recording time from about 1 hour
to up to 2 and a half hours so that you can achieve the
best picture quality. If a part of a DVD-RAM disc has
already been recorded, the “AT” mode sets the bit rate
suitable for the remaining space on the disc. (The
picture quality is determined referring the remaining
space just before recording. When the remaining
space is scarce in the disc, the picture quality may
decrease from what you set beforehand or the
recording may stop halfway.) “AT” mode is available
also on DVD-R/RW recordings.
When you want to record a music program or
animation with high picture quality, it is recommended
that you select the “Manual” mode. If you select more
than 6 Mbps, you can usually record with considerably
higher picture quality. However the higher you set the
bit rate, the shorter the recording time.
Introduction
Technical Information
51
Playback
Play your favorite contents.
Information on playback
Playing recorded contents
(CONTENT MENU)
Playing a DVD video disc
Pausing a TV broadcast to
resume later
Playing a TV program currently
being recorded
Playing at various speeds
Locating by entering the number
Watching a TV broadcast in the
sub window (P in P Playback)
Selecting the camera angle
Selecting Subtitles
Zooming a picture
Selecting the Sound
Viewing JPEG files
Playing MP3/WMA Files
Checking the current status and
settings
Functions in the Quick Menu
Playback
Information on playback
The operation procedure depends on the kind of disc. See the respective pages for basic procedure to
play the disc.
To play contents recorded onto the HDD or DVD-RAM discs
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (
page 55)
To play a DVD video disc
Playing a DVD video disc (
page 60)
To play a DVD-R/RW disc
DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder
page 55)
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (
DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices
page 55)
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (
page 60)
Playing a DVD video disc (
DVD-R/RW discs recorded in DVD-VR mode
page 59)
Playing a DVD-RW disc recorded in DVD-VR mode (
To switch the drive to play
Press the STOP button to stop playback. Then press the HDD or DVD button to select the drive.
To switch the picture to view TV broadcasts
Press the STOP button to stop playback.
To start recording
Press the STOP button to stop playback.
Then press the HDD or DVD button to select a recording media, and press the REC button to start recording.
Screen Protection
If you pause playback or display a menu and leave it still for about 15 minutes, the recorder switches the output
picture source to a TV broadcast or connected equipment.
A still picture may be displayed after all titles are played. In this case, the screen protection activates after about 10
seconds.
Notes
• Do not move the recorder during playback. It may damage the disc.
• Occasionally the picture may stop at the last scene, or the main menu may appear after playing.
If you display a still picture such as the main menu on the TV screen for a prolonged period, the TV may be damaged (image
burn). To prevent this, press the STOP button to stop playback.
• A still picture for about 15 minutes while the TIMESLIP indicator illuminates, will return to normal playback. If the playback is
completed, a still picture of the title end will continue unless you press the TIMESLIP button.
54
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU)
Introduction
Titles and chapters recorded on the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW disc are displayed in thumbnail view, so
that you can easily locate a desired one.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
CHANNEL
1
Recording
ANGLE SUBTITLE
During stop or playback, press CONTENT
MENU.
The following CONTENT MENU (Title List) appears.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
CONTENT MENU
e.g.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
CONTENT Title List
MENU
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Attribution
(original/playlist)
page 87
E
SE
AM
AR
FR
DJ
US
RE
T
STOP
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
2
Press
ENTER
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
P in P
/
/
/
to select a title (chapter).
You can view succeeding or prior pages by pressing the
/
) button.
PICTURE SEARCH (
To select a chapter, select a title and press the
button.
The Chapter List appears.
button again, you can return to the
By pressing the
Title List.
Library
REMAIN
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
Original
Editing
PAUSE
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
You can switch between HDD and DVD drives by
presing the HDD or DVD button.
CH
ENTER
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
(0:53:45)
Original
Playback
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
/A
HDD
1 / 2 Page
001:
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Function setup
3
Press ENTER.
Playback starts from a selected title (chapter).
ENTER
QUICK MENU
PICTURE SEARCH
SKIP
55
Others
Notes
• In a CONTENT MENU, titles (Original) precede titles (Playlist), in order from the oldest one respectively.
• To turn off the CONTENT MENU, press the CONTENT MENU button. Absence of operations for longer than about 15
minutes also turns off the CONTENT MENU.
• The mark is displayed in every thumbnail when “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) is set to “Title resume”. When set to
“Serial playback”, it is displayed in a thumbnail last operated.
• You can change a thumbnail picture. See
page 100.
• You cannot display the CONTENT MENU for DVD-R/RW discs recorded on other devices.
• For playing a recorded title while recording another, see
page 36.
• A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This
thumbnail cannot start playback.
Playback
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)
To stop playback
Press STOP.
STOP
To pause playback (still playback)
Press PAUSE.
Notes
• Depending on the status or the contents, playback may not
start from the location last stopped, but instead another
location. For example, from the beginning of the disc or
title.
• Depending on the disc, there may be a slight difference
between the location the recorder memorized and the
actual location where playback starts.
• This function is not available on DVD-R/RW discs.
• The resuming function will not work if the write-protect tab
is set to “PROTECT” (
page 8).
PAUSE
Playing the digest (Skip Search)
To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button or
the PAUSE button.
Note
• Sound is muted during still mode.
Resuming playback from the location last
stopped (Title resume)
The recorder memorizes the location you last stopped
playback to resume there.
To use this function, set “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) to “Title resume.” The recorder will
memorize the location you last stopped at in each title,
so you can resume playback there. For example, if
there are 6 titles, you can start each of them as if you
had stored 6 video tapes in the recorder.
• To return to the beginning of the title
During playback, press the QUICK MENU button,
then press the / buttons to select “Restart title,”
then press the ENTER button.
• To play another title
Press the CONTENT MENU button to display
“CONTENT MENU Title List,” then select a title.
You can make the recorder memorize only the very
last point, regardless of the number of titles. Set
page 160) to “Serial
“HDD/RAM title play” (
playback.”
• To return to the beginning of the title
) button repeatedly until the
Press the SKIP (
beginning of the title appears.
• To play the other title
/
) button repeatedly.
Press the SKIP (
56
This feature repeats playback of about 5 seconds and
skip of 1 minute from the beginning to the end of a
recorded title, so that you can view the digest of it.
page 55, and
1) Perform steps 1 and 2 on
select a title that you want to view the digest.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu is displayed.
3) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
4) Press / to select “Skip search”, then press
ENTER.
The Skip Search starts.
Notes
• This feature can be used only one title (original) recorded
on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
• While using this feature, you cannot use speed-related
functions such as fast forward or fast reverse.
• If you press the ENTER button while using this feature, the
normal playback starts.
• To cancel this feature, press the STOP button twice.
Playing all titles (original) in a disc
(Play All ORG Titles)
1) After step 1 on
page 55, press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
You can play all Original titles in the HDD or a DVDRAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on the
CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one
video tape.
3) Press / to select “Intro scan”, then press
ENTER.
The recorder plays the first 5 seconds of each title
beginning from title 1.
You can go forward or back by pressing the SKIP
buttons.
Recording
2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
Introduction
Viewing the first scenes of titles (Original)
(Intro scan)
1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
e.g.
Playback
: to go to the next title.
Quick Menu
: to go back to the current title.
Press twice to go back to the previous title.
4) When you find a desired title, press ENTER.
The selected title is played.
Bit rate
Intro scan
Special playback mode
Skip search
Disc management
Repeat all ORG titles
DVD compatible mode
Play all ORG titles
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
Notes
• To stop Intro Scan, press the STOP button twice.
• This feature can be used only titles (Original) recorded on
the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
Exit
3) Press / to select “Play all ORG titles”, then
press ENTER.
e.g.
Library
Set “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) to “Serial
playback”. You can play all titles in the HDD and DVDRAM disc in the order of the thumbnails on the
CONTENT MENU, as if they were recorded in one
video tape.
Editing
Playing all titles (original/playlist) in a disc
SAP
Quick Menu
Bit rate
Intro scan
Special playback mode
Skip search
Disc management
Repeat all ORG titles
DVD compatible mode
Play all ORG titles
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
Function setup
DVD-Video:CHP create
AV record quality
SAP
Exit
Playback starts from the beginning of title 1.
57
Others
Notes
• To stop “Play all ORG titles”, press the STOP button twice.
(However, doing this when you are playing a title recorded
in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc while recording (
page
36) will stop the recording.)
Alternatively, press the QUICK MENU button to display the
quick menu, and press the / buttons to select “Cancel
play all ORG titles” and press the ENTER button.
• When the last title is complete, All ORG Title Play stops.
• If you select “Repeat all ORG titles” at step 3), “Play all
ORG titles” repeats.
• This function is available only for titles recorded on the
HDD or DVD-RAM discs.
Playback
Playing recorded contents (CONTENT MENU) (Continued)
Checking the background information on a
selected title
Changing the order of the titles
1) At step 2 on
page 55, select a title (chapter)
then press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
The CONTENT MENU appears.
2) Press / to select “Title information”, then
press ENTER.
Detailed information of a selected title (chapter)
appears. You can switch the chapters in the title by
/
) buttons.
pressing the PITURE SEARCH (
Notes
• From the Quick Menu on the ”CONTENT MENU Title
Information”, you can change the details such as name,
genre or time, which will help sorting and searching on
Library system (
page 140).
Also you can protect the title from unexpected erasure (
page 50).
• To return to the previous display, press the button.
• To cancel the procedure, press the CONTENT MENU
button.
You can change the order or sort the titles by genre.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / to select “Display changeover”, then
press ENTER.
e.g.
CONTENT Title List
MENU
Quick Menu
1 / 2 Page
HDD Title
: information
Arrange
2004/06/08 07:00Sort by genre
Create thumbnail
am TV:4
Sort by original
High speed dubbing
(0:53:45)
Rate conversion dubbing
Sort by playlist
Chapter functionOriginal
Edit functon
2004/06/12 09:00
Special playback
pm mode
TV:3
(0:52:40)
Save chaptures images
Disc informationOriginal
Display changeover
2004/07/12 11:00
Specific page
pmjump
TV:4
Title delete
(0:30:08)
Exit
Original
HDD
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
4) Press / to select the item, then press
ENTER.
• Arrange
The titles are rearranged along with the selected
order.
Press the / buttons to select the order, then
press the ENTER button.
• Sort by genre
Titles of the selected genre are sorted.
Press the / buttons to select the genre, then
press the ENTER button.
• Sort by original
Titles (Original) are sorted.
• Sort by playlist
Titles (Playlist) are sorted.
Note
• The recorder holds your selection until the power is turned
off. To cancel, select “Display changeover” then “Cancel
Arrange/Narrowing” from the Quick Menu.
58
Introduction
Jumping to a specified page
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
The CONTENT MENU appears.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Recording
3) Press / to select “Specific page jump”, then
press ENTER.
4) Enter the page number you want by pressing
ADJUST, / or the number buttons.
e.g.
CONTENT Title List
MENU
1 / 2 Page
HDD
HDD :
Playback
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
(0:53:45)
Original
Specific
2004/06/12
09:00Page Jump
pm TV:3
Page Number – – –
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
Original
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
Editing
To clear the number, press the CLEAR button.
5) Press ENTER.
The specified page appears.
See
Library
Playing a DVD-RW disc recorded in DVD-VR
mode
page 55.
Function setup
Notes
• Some disc’s conditions or discs which contain copy once
contents may not permit proper playback.
• “Title resume” (
page 160) is not available.
Others
59
Playback
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Playing a DVD video disc
You can also play VIDEO CDs, audio CDs or finalization processed DVD-R/RW discs in the same manner.
page 55.
To play recorded contents, follow the instructions on
Preparation
• Turn on a TV or audio system and select the corresponding input source that the recorder is connected to.
page 20)
• Load a disc you want to play. (
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
DVD
1
Press DVD.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
DVD
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
/A
US
The DVD indicator on the front panel illuminates.
This status indicates that the recorder is ready to play a
disc in the disc tray (DVD mode).
T
PI C
T
PAUSE
STOP
E
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
STOP
REMAIN DISPLAY
PAUSE
UR
2
Press PLAY.
PLAY
Playback starts.
• Depending on the disc, playback starts automatically
by loading the disc.
• The recorder may take a short time to start playback.
This occurs because the recorder is reading the data
of a disc.
TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
To stop playback
To pause playback (still playback)
Press STOP.
Press PAUSE.
STOP
PAUSE
To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button or
the PAUSE button.
Note
• Sound is muted during still mode.
Note
• DVD video disc provides high resolution pictures and a lot of information. Because of this, you may notice some fine picture
noises on TV screen, which you have never seen with regular broadcast TV program. While the amount of noise depends on
the TV you use with the recorder, you should generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD
video discs.
60
DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
You can resume playback from the location where you
stopped.
If you stop playback by pressing the STOP button
twice, the resume playback feature will be cancelled.
DVD-RW
DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Some DVD video discs may include a top menu, on
which you can view the structure of contents or select
a scene. Most of the top menus automatically appear
in certain scenes, and also are displayed on demand.
Actual operation of the top menu depends on the disc.
This section explains a general example of how to
operate a top menu. Also refer to the instructions of
the disc itself.
TOP MENU
Playback
ENTER
/ / /
Editing
Notes
• Resume feature cannot function when:
– you select a disc menu language (
page 154) or change
the parental lock setting (
page 155).
– you play a PBC-featured VIDEO CD while “PBC” (
page
156) is set to “On”.
– you open the disc tray.
– you cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process of a DVD-RW
disc.
• There may be a difference in the location where playback
resumes depending on the disc.
• While the recorder retains a location in memory, initial
setting changes with GUI may function only after the
memory is cleared.
Locating a title using the top menu
Recording
If you press the PLAY button after stopping playback,
playback resumes from the location you have stopped.
Introduction
Resuming playback from the location last
stopped (Resume Play)
1) Press TOP MENU.
3) Press ENTER.
Others
61
Function setup
Notes
• The instructions above describe basic procedures which
may vary depending on the contents of the DVD video
disc. If different instructions appear on the TV screen,
follow those instructions.
• If you display the top menu during playback and press the
TOP MENU button again without selecting any title, the
recorder may resume playback from the point where you
first pressed the TOP MENU button. (depending on the
actual DVD video disc.)
• This method of locating a title is available only on a disc
that contains a top menu.
• Instruction notes of discs may refer to the button that
displays the top menu as the TITLE button.
Library
2) Press / / / to select the title you want.
If the titles in the top menu are assigned a number,
you can directly locate a specific title by pressing its
designated number with the number buttons.
Playback
HDD
Pausing a TV broadcast to resume later
This function enables you to pause a TV broadcast and resume viewing at a later, more convenient time,
by storing the TV broadcast temporarily on the HDD.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
While viewing a TV broadcast via this recorder
or immediately before it starts, press TIMESLIP.
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
HDD
TIMESLIP
The current picture pauses.
The recorder begins to store the broadcast on the HDD
the moment you press the TIMESLIP button.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Resume playback by pressing PAUSE or PLAY.
PAUSE
PLAY
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
• You can confirm how far you are from the current
broadcast by pressing the TIME BAR button.
• Playback may not resume immediately after you press
the PLAY or PAUSE button.
US
RE
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
3
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
TU
PI C
PLAY
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
Locate a scene you want by the following
methods.
Fast-forward/fast-reverse:
Press the PICTURE SEARCH button.
Forward/reverse Slow-motion:
Press the SLOW button.
Forward/reverse frame by frame play:
First press the PAUSE button then press the FRAME button.
PROGRESSIVE
• To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button.
• You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the
current broadcast.
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
FRAME
TIME BAR
SLOW
PICTURE SEARCH
4
Press TIMESLIP to exit this mode.
TIMESLIP
The recorder stops storing the broadcast on the HDD.
A message appears and asks you whether you will save
the stored data or erase it.
Press the / buttons to select, then press the ENTER
button.
Notes
• This function is not available during recording.
• Pause TV recording stops when the HDD is filled up. It will not begin if the HDD is full.
• While using this pause TV recording, you cannot program a recording.
• Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.
62
Playback
Introduction
HDD
DVD-RAM
Playing a TV program currently being recorded
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
1
While recording a TV program on the HDD or a
DVD-RAM disc, press TIMESLIP.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
TIMESLIP
Recording
ANGLE SUBTITLE
Introduction
You can begin playback from the beginning of a program currently being recorded.
You will find this function of great advantage on long programs, as you do not have to wait for the end of
recording to begin playback.
The recorder displays a TV program as it is being
recorded.
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
2
ENTER
Go back to the beginning of the TV program
using SKIP.
SK
CH
IP
E
SE
AM
DJ
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Function setup
TIME BAR
PLAY
Fast-forward/fast-reverse:
Press the PICTURE SEARCH button.
Forward/reverse Slow-motion:
Press the SLOW buttons.
Forward/reverse frame by frame play:
First press the PAUSE button then press the FRAME button.
• To resume normal playback, press the PLAY button.
• You can play in fast-forward to within 10 seconds prior to the
current broadcast.
PROGRESSIVE
4
PAUSE
FRAME
SLOW
Locate a scene you want through the
following operations if necessary.
Library
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV/VIDEO
3
Editing
REMAIN
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
When you go back to the beginning, playback starts
automatically.
You can confirm how far you are from the current
broadcast by pressing the TIME BAR button.
AR
FR
/A
Playback
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Press TIMESLIP to exit.
The current broadcast returns.
TIMESLIP
Notes
• Time slip recording/playback stops when the disc is filled up. You can play up to a location where the recorder stopped the
recording. The time slip recording/playback cannot begin if the disc is full.
• The playback picture may appear after a delay of several seconds.
• The playback location will never be identical to the record location in the program. It will always trail the record location by a
few seconds.
• While using time slip recording/playback, you cannot program a recording.
• While the TIMESLIP indicator is on, you cannot change the setting of the feature that turns off the recorder after a
programmed operation has finished.
• Even while “Auto power off” is selected, the recorder does not turn off if the recording end time comes during playback of a
program being recorded.
• This function is not available on a DVD-RAM disc while the A-B recording is executing or when “Relay recording” is set to
“On.”
• Playback may jump a few seconds back or pause depending on the disc or data condition.
63
Others
PICTURE SEARCH
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Playing at various speeds
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
1
VCD
CD
: Fast forward playback
: Fast reverse playback
CH
SK
W
O
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
During normal playback, press PICTURE
SEARCH.
SE
AR
IP
SL
LIBRARY
HDD
PI C
TU
RE
Each time you press the button, the playback speed
changes.
During fast forward playback at “ ” speed, sound is
reproduced. (Not available on VIDEO CD.)
• This function is not available when you play a title
recorded on a DVD-RAM disc while recording
another.
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
T
PAUSE
REC
/
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
PLAY
INSTANT REPLAY
REMAIN
INSTANT SKIP
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Notes
• The playback speed may vary depending on the disc.
• Depending on the disc or data condition, picture and sound
in fast forward playback at “ ” speed may be disturbed.
Time bar display
Fast-forward or fast-reverse playback automatically
displays a time bar.
e.g.
00 : 00 : 00
To resume normal playback
00 : 00 : 40
Press PLAY.
For details, see
To skip the contents in pre-determined
increments
To skip back in pre-determined increments
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
During playback, press INSTANT SKIP.
Each time you press the button, you can skip by the
specified time.
You can select the interval per press of the button.
page 160).
See “Instant skip interval”(
To skip by 1/20 of whole
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
During playback, press / .
Each time you press the button, you can skip by 1/20
of the current title or track if it is longer than 1 minute.
64
Location 00 : 00 : 24:05F
page 81.
During playback, press INSTANT REPLAY.
Each time you press the button, you can go back by
the specified time to resume playback.
You can select the interval per press of the button.
page 160).
See “Instant replay interval” (
Notes
• Some discs may not permit this operation.
• Depending on disc structure, some operations may be
limited.
• Depending on playback status, some operations may not
work.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Introduction
Skipping to the next/previous chapter or track
CD
NAVI
SK
W
O
IP
SL
CONTENT MENU
Press SKIP ( / ) repeatedly until the
chapter or track number you want appears.
Recording
1
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.
SK
IP
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
T
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
IP
SL
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Press SLOW during playback.
SL
OW
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
/A
US
T
PAUSE
REC
STOP
VCD
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
Function setup
1
SK
OW
HDD
Library
Playing in slow-motion
Editing
Notes
• Some titles may not display chapter numbers.
• When playing the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, you can access chapters only in the current title if “HDD/RAM title play” (
page 160) is set to “Title resume”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Serial playback”.
• When playing a DVD video disc or a DVD-R/RW disc, you can locate chapters only in the current title if “DVD title stop” (
page 156) is set to “On”. To access chapters in other titles, set to “Off”. However, in this instance even though you press the
SKIP button (
) to go back to the previous title, playback starts not from the last chapter of the title but from the first
chapter.
Playback
US
PAUSE
: Playback starts from the beginning of the next
chapter or track.
: Playback starts from the beginning of the current
chapter or track.
When you press twice, playback starts from the
beginning of the previous chapter or track.
: Forward slow-motion
: Reverse slow-motion
Each time you press the SLOW button, the slow-motion
speed changes.
QUICK MENU
Others
PLAY
Notes
• Slow-motion does not provide smooth playback.
• When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse slow-motion playback
is not available.
• The speed level displayed is approximate.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
65
Playback
Playing at various speeds (Continued)
SK
W
O
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
1
IP
SL
Playing frame by frame
ENTER
VCD
During playback, press PAUSE.
A still picture is displayed.
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
PAUSE
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
2
QUICK MENU
REC
Press FRAME (
AM
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
/A
E
PLAY
DJ
).
: Playback direction
: Opposite direction
FR
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
REMAIN
/
US
T
Pi P
To resume normal playback
Notes
• Sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
• Frame by frame playback cannot provide smooth playback.
• Picture may advance more than 1 frame at a time.
• Depending on the scene, some frames may not be played.
• When playing a VIDEO CD, reverse frame by frame
playback is not available.
Press PLAY or PAUSE.
Viewing still pictures (Playing a disc that contains still pictures)
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
1
Press PLAY.
The first still picture on a disc is displayed.
IP
SL
LIBRARY
PLAY
Some DVD video discs may allow you to change the
pictures using the PLAY, ENTER or SKIP button.
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
/A
US
T
PAUSE
REC
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
2
Press FRAME (
AM
E
/A
/
).
: Displays the next still picture.
: Displays the previous still picture.
QUICK MENU
FR
66
DVD-RAM DVD-VIDEO
DJ
US
T
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Locating by entering the number
Introduction
Locating by entering the number of a desired section
Normally titles, chapters, and tracks are numbered. By entering these numbers, you can access a desired section.
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
1
Press T.SEARCH.
If you are using a VIDEO CD/audio CD, skip step 2.
e.g.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
T.SEARCH
001
Title
Chapter 0001
Playback
Search
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
CH
e.g. When you want to locate a chapter.
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
Editing
2
ENTER
Press / to select a section (title or chapter)
you want to locate.
US
U
IC T
T
PAUSE
RE
P
PLAY
STOP
001
Title
Chapter 0001
T.SEARCH
3
CLEAR
5
Press the number buttons to enter a number
of the section.
e.g. To enter 25, press “2”, then press “5”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
Function setup
2
3
Library
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
4
Search
QUICK MENU
REC
REC
1
ENTER
0
DELETE
7
8
SETUP
9
ENTER
0
+10
Playback starts from the selected location.
Others
Open the lid.
4
Press ENTER.
ENTER
CLEAR
Notes
• Pressing the CLEAR button resets the numbers. To clear the display, press the T.SEARCH button several times (depending
on the disc).
• This method of locating a title is available only on a disc that contains title numbers.
• If a title is erased, the numbers of the following titles decrease respectively.
• When you record a new title (Original) on the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc, it is added prior to current titles (Playlist), and each
following title (Playlist) reference number will advance by a factor of 1.
67
Playback
Locating by entering the number (Continued)
Locating a specific point by entering its elapsed time (Time Search)
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
1
REC MENU EDIT MENU
You may have to press repeatedly, depending on the
disc. Press the button until the following display
appears.
e.g.
Title 001
T.SEARCH
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
SK
W
O
IP
SL
Press T.SEARCH.
Search
Time
00 : 00 : 00
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
REC
2
Press the number buttons and / to enter
the desired time location on the disc.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
e.g. To enter 1 hour, 25 minutes, and 30 seconds
“0” → “1” → “ ” → “2” → “5” → “ ” → “3” → “0”
hour
minute
second
ENTER
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLEAR
DELETE
SETUP
ENTER
0
+10
3
Press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected location.
ENTER
Open the lid.
CLEAR
Notes
• Some discs may not respond to this process.
• Some scenes may not be accessed precisely as you specified.
• This method for accessing specific locations is available only within the current title of the HDD or a DVD-RAM/R/RW/DVD
video disc or within a current track of a VIDEO CD/audio CD.
• Pressing the CLEAR button resets the numbers.
68
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Watching a TV broadcast in the sub window (P in P Playback)
Introduction
During playback, you can watch a TV broadcast in the sub window. (P in P : Picture in Picture)
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During playback, press P in P.
CHANNEL
P in P
HDD
TIMESLIP
Recording
1
OPEN/CLOSE
A sub window (program on the air or on the recording)
appears.
e.g.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Playback
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
E
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
2
Press / / /
sub window.
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
to select the position of the
You can shift the sub window in following 4 directions.
ENTER
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
Library
REMAIN
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
↑ / ↓ / ← / → is the moving range.
To turn off the sub window, press the P in P button.
CHANNEL
Others
Notes
• You can change the channel of the sub window by pressing the CHANNEL
/
button.
• The P in P function is available only during playback.
• You cannot swap the playback picture with the picture within the sub window, or change the audio settings.
• Press the P in P button during “Chase Play” or “Pause TV”, the actual broadcast appears on the sub window in real time.
• If this function is stopped after shifting the sub window, before you press the P in P button again, the sub window will appear
in the last position you set. However, if you turn off the power, the sub window re-appears in the lower right (default) position.
69
Playback
DVD-VIDEO
Selecting the camera angle
If the scene was recorded with multiple angles, you can easily change the camera angle of the scene you
are watching.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press ANGLE while playing a scene recorded
with multiple angles.
CHANNEL
ANGLE
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
While playing a scene recorded with multiple angles, the
angle icon appears on the TV screen and on the front
panel. Press the ANGLE button while the angle icon is
displayed.
Angle icon
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
Angle
1/6
SK
W
O
Total number of angles
IP
SL
e.g.
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
Current selection
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
2
Press ADJUST while the angle number is
displayed on the TV screen.
You can also select the camera angle by pressing the
ANGLE button several times.
FR
AM
/A
E
QUICK MENU
REC
DJ
US
T
Angle
1/6
2/6
3/6
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
P in P
6/6
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
• The angle icon disappears after about 3 seconds if no
further selections are made.
Notes
• You can also change the camera angle during still playback. The camera angle changes to the new setting when you resume
normal playback.
• If you pause a picture immediately after changing a camera angle, the resumed playback picture may not display the new
camera angle.
• Depending on the disc, the camera angle may not change even though the angle number changes.
To turn off the angle icon
Set “On screen display” in the setup menu to “Off” (
page 159).
Most of the on-screen display including the angle icon will not appear.
While the angle icon is flashing on the front panel display, you can change the camera angle.
70
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Selecting Subtitles
Introduction
You can display subtitles on the TV screen and select a subtitle language from those included on the
disc.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
The current subtitle setting appears.
CHANNEL
SUBTITLE
HDD
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Press SUBTITLE during playback.
TIMESLIP
DVD
e.g.
Subtitle
Status
1 ––
Off
Setting number and language
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
E
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
2
Press to select “Status,” then press ADJUST
to select “On.”
Skip to step 3 if “On” is already displayed.
ENTER
QUICK MENU
REC
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
/A
Playback
The language code appears instead of the language
name. Refer to the list of languages and their
abbreviations. (
page 171)
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
AM
E
/A
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
US
T
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
3
Press to select “Subtitle,” then press
ADJUST to select a language.
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
DJ
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Library
FR
REMAIN
The subtitles of recorded languages appear.
ENTER
Good evening!
Bonsoir!
FR
E
DJ
US
T
Notes
• Some DVD video discs are set to display subtitles
automatically.
• Depending on the scene, subtitles may not appear
immediately after you set the subtitle function to on.
• Some DVD video discs will allow you to change subtitle
languages and turn subtitles on or off only via the disc
menu.
Others
AM
/A
The display turns off after about 3 seconds if you do not
make a selection.
To turn the subtitles on or off
At step 2, select “Off” by pressing the ADJUST
button.
71
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Zooming a picture
You can magnify areas within a picture.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
1
Press ZOOM.
A zoom scope appears.
ZOOM
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
e.g.
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
2
Select a zoom point and magnification level.
:
Raises the magnification level.
QUICK MENU
REC
:
Lowers the magnification level.
ENTER
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
/ / / :
Moves the zoom point. (only after the image has been
magnified)
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
CLEAR
CLEAR :
Returns the zoom point to the center of the picture.
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
Notes
• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.
• During some scenes, the buttons may not work as described.
• The zoom feature is canceled when the disc menu is operated.
• The magnification level varies depending on the picture size you select
(
page 44, in “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
• The zoom feature is not available while displaying a GUI.
• The zoom feature is canceled when you stop playback or start playback.
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLEAR
DELETE
7
8
SETUP
9
ENTER
0
+10
Open the lid.
72
To cancel the zoom
Press ZOOM.
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Selecting the sound
Introduction
You can select a preferred language and a sound format.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
The current audio setting appears.
CHANNEL
AUDIO
HDD
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Press AUDIO during playback or while
receiving a broadcast.
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
The language code appears instead of the language
name. Refer to the list of languages and their
page 171)
abbreviations. (
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
W
O
2
Press ADJUST while the audio setting is
displayed on the TV screen.
Playback
SK
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Variation of channels depends on the disc or the type of
TV broadcast.
ENTER
FR
AM
E
/A
US
T
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
• HDD DVD-RAM , TV channel signals
Stereo sound
→ “Stereo” (left channel and right channel)
→ “Stereo L” (left channel)
→ “Stereo R” (right channel)
(→ Back to “Stereo”)
Editing
DJ
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
E
/A
SAP sound
“Main” → “SAP” → “Main + SAP” (→ Back to “Main”)
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
TV
CHANNEL
PROGRESSIVE
e.g.
Sound
Output
1 English
PCM
2ch
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
P in P
DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Library
DVD-RW
Language name / sound recording system / No. of
channels
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
• VCD
“Stereo” → “Stereo L” → “Stereo R” (→ Back to “Stereo”)
The display turns off if you do not operate for more than
3 seconds.
If you press the / buttons to select “Output,” you can
page 158) by using
select the audio output setting (
the ADJUST buttons.
MENU
Others
MTS Broadcast Compatibility
This recorder can receive or record MTS (Multichannel TV sound) broadcast.
By connecting the recorder to your stereo system or stereo TV, you will experience the SAP or stereo sound.
SAP (Second Audio Program broadcast)
A separate audio program, usually broadcast in a second language with the main language.
Sounds in playback
You can play SAP and/or stereo broadcasts with this recorder. Refer to steps 1 and 2 to select a desired audio.
Desired sound
SAP sound
Stereo sound
L, R indicators on the front panel
R (right) is on.
Both R (right) and L (left) are on.
Sound output
SAP
Stereo Sound
73
Playback
Selecting the sound (Continued)
Recorded sounds
According to your setting of “SAP” on the setup menu screen, (
page 158), the sound is recorded onto different
channels of the disc below. Set “SAP” to “On” or “Off” appropriately.
Setting on the setup screen
DVD Compatible Mode
SAP
Off
Off
On
Main
Off
On
SAP
Off
On
Type of receiving broadcast
Stereo + SAP
Mono + SAP
Stereo
Mono
Stereo + SAP
Mono + SAP
Stereo
Mono
Stereo + SAP
Mono + SAP
Stereo
Mono
Stereo + SAP
Mono + SAP
Stereo
Mono
Stereo + SAP
Mono + SAP
Stereo
Mono
Stereo + SAP
Mono + SAP
Stereo
Mono
L
Mono
L
Mono
L+R
Mono
L
Mono
L
Mono
L
Mono
L+R
Mono
L
Mono
L
Mono
L
Mono
SAP
SAP
L
Mono
Contents of recorded sound
Lch
Rch
R
Mono
R
Mono
SAP
SAP
R
Mono
R
Mono
R
Mono
L+R
Mono
R
Mono
R
Mono
R
Mono
SAP
SAP
R
Mono
* This will be “Stereo” when a recording is made with “L-PCM” selected.
74
Type of record
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Dual Mono*
Dual Mono*
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Introduction
Recording
Notes
• Some discs allow you to change audio selections only via the disc menu. If this is the case, press the MENU button and
choose the appropriate language from the selections on the disc menu.
page 154)
• When you turn on the recorder or replace a disc, the recorder returns to the initial default setting. (
Depending on the disc, the sound that is specified the disc is played back.
• Immediately after you have switched sounds, there may be a temporary discrepancy between the display and actual
sound.
• The BITSTREAM/PCM jack may not output SAP sound you select. In this instance, set “Audio out select” to “PCM”.
(
page 158)
• You cannot change SAP sound if recorded with “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) set to “Main”. Even when “DVD
compatible mode” (
page 162) is set to “Off,” the recorder regards it as “Main” when recording to a DVD-R/RW disc.
Library
Function setup
* “DVD video disc” above does not include DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder.
• Do not select a connection or setting indicated as “Noise” in the above list.
Editing
Audio setting ( page 158) and output in the default setting display
Bitstream
Analog 2ch
PCM
Disc
Sound format
BITSTREAM/
Analog (L/R)
Analog (L/R)
Analog (L/R)
BITSTREAM/
BITSTREAM/
PCM jack
jacks
jacks
jacks
PCM jack
PCM jack
Dolby Digital
Bitstream
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
Linear 48 kHz/24 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
DVDPCM 96 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
—
48 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
video
96 kHz/20 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
—
48 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
disc*
96 kHz/24 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
—
48 kHz/16 bit
96 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
48 kHz/24 bit
DTS
Bitstream
—
Bitstream
—
—
—
MPEG2
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
VIDEO CD
MPEG1
44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit
Audio Linear PCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit 44.1 kHz/16 bit
CD
DTS
Bitstream
Bitstream
Bitstream
(Noise)
(Noise)
(Noise)
Dolby Digital
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
HDD
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
Dolby Digital
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
48 kHz/20 bit
DVD-RAM/
Linear PCM 48 kHz/16 bit 48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
R/RW
MPEG2
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
Bitstream
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
48 kHz/16 bit
MP3/WMA
CD-R/RW
44.1 kHz or 32 kHz or 48 kHz / 16 bit
Playback
Output sound conversion table
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Others
75
Playback
Viewing JPEG files
You can play JPEG files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on the recorder.
Preparations
• Prepare a compatible disc (
page 77) that contains JPEG files you want to view.
page 160) to “Photo”.
• Set “Priority contents” (
• Make your TV shape conform to the 4:3 picture size. Only 4:3 pictures can be played regardless of the function
page 44, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”). If the TV is adjusted
settings via the on-screen displays of the recorder (
to other sizes, e.g. “WIDE,” images will appear to be horizontally expanded. For details, refer to the owner’s
manual of your TV.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
1
Press DVD.
DVD
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
2
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
ENTER
Load a CD that contains JPEG files.
Each photo appears for about 3 seconds (slide show).
E
/A
DJ
If a slide show does not start, press the PLAY button.
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
OPEN/CLOSE
US
U
IC T
T
PAUSE
STOP
REC
REC
RE
P
PLAY
Depending on the disc, the “CONTENT MENU Picture
List” appears. See “On the “CONTENT MENU Picture
List”” (
page 77) to operate.
QUICK MENU
Notes
• Some files may not display their own entire images depending on the size.
• JPEG picture playback is not available during recording on the HDD.
• Operation to JPEG file will be disabled at about 5 minutes before a programmed recording starts.
To stop playback (slide show)
To rotate a picture
Press STOP.
If you press the PLAY button after pressing the STOP
button, playback will start from the photo you stopped.
Press ANGLE repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, the picture rotates by
90° degree.
To pause playback (slide show)
Press PAUSE.
To resume, press the PAUSE button again or press
the PLAY button.
Notes
• The rotated image is displayed after its original posture
appears momentarily.
To magnify a picture
Follow the procedure on
To skip photos
During playback, press the SKIP button repeatedly.
: To skip forward.
: To skip backward.
76
page 72.
Notes
• The magnified image is displayed after its original posture
appears momentarily.
• For small pictures, the reduction level may be limited.
Direct input of a photo number
Viewing a specified photo (single view)
Full screen still view.
2 ways are available:
1) During playback or stop, press T.SEARCH.
An input window appears.
e.g.
1) Press CONTENT MENU.
The “CONTENT MENU Picture List” appears.
Search
Depending on the disc, the recorder creates either
temporary folder, “Auto” or “All”.
e.g.
CONTENT Picture List
MENU
3) Press ENTER.
The selected photo appears in full screen.
DH100001
002
DH100002
003
DH100001
To change the playback order
004
007
010
013
DH100004
DH100003
DH100006
DH100009
number
005
008
011
014
DH100001
DH100004
DH100007
DH100010
006
009
012
015
DH100002
DH100005
DH100008
DH100011
1) During playback (slide show) or stop, press
QUICK MENU.
For CD other than above. All files are listed.
CONTENT Picture List
MENU
2) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER.
To shift the cursor, press the / buttons.
Reverse
Repeat
: To reverse the order.
: To repeat the current folder.
CD
1 / 3 Page
All
DH100001
002
DH100002
003
DH100001
004
007
DH100004
DH100003
005
008
DH100001
DH100004
006
009
DH100002
DH100005
3) Press ENTER.
Playback in the selected mode starts.
Editing
001
• Some CDs may not comply with the above.
2) Press / / / to select a folder or photo.
/ ) button
Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH (
turns the pages.
CONTENT Picturs
MENU
//
CD
1 / 8 Page
JPEG
To return to the previous list, press the
again.
button
The selected photo appears in full screen.
Notes
• The “CONTENT MENU Picture List” cannot show all the
files in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of regular
play of the disc.
• The larger the file size is, the longer the thumbnail takes
time to appear.
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space
are not displayed.
JPEG disc compatibility with this recorder is limited as
follows:
• Playable discs:
CD-ROM, CD-R
CD-RW is not recommendable.
• CD physical format:
Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1
• File system:
ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet
• File name:
A file name should be in alphabet and
numerals only, and must incorporate “JPG”
extension.
e.g.“********.JPG”
• Total number of folders:
Less than 256
• Total number of files:
Less than 1000
Some files may not display their own entire image
depending on the size.
Some discs may not permit this operation. Especially,
the following conditions of included files will increase
the disc’s disability.
1. Pixels over 5000 x 5000 in height and/or width
2. File format except Exif
77
Others
3) Press ENTER.
If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and
3) until your favorite file appears.
CANON QuickCD
FUJICOLOR CD
Kodak Picture CD
NORITSU QSS CD
Function setup
Pressing the ANGLE button rotates the picture. The
rotation of pictures is kept until the CD is ejected.
JPEG files compatibility
Discs whose compatibility with this recorder has been
confirmed by TOSHIBA are as follows.
Library
button, the list changes to
If you press the
thumbnail view (“CONTENT MENU Pictures”).
e.g.
Playback
001
File
016
017
018
DH100012
DH100013
DH100014
If you
select
this icon
and
press the
ENTER
button,
019
020
021
DH100015
DH100016
DH100017
upper
folders
appear.
022
023
024
DH100018
DH100019
DH100020
e.g.
2) Input a photo number using the number buttons
or ADJUST.
CD
1 / 3 Page
Auto
“All”:
001
Recording
“Auto”: For CD of which compatibility confirmed by
TOSHIBA. Only playable files are listed.
Photo
Introduction
On the “CONTENT MENU Picture List”
Playback
Playing MP3/WMA files
You can play MP3/WMA files that have been recorded on a CD-R or CD-ROM on this recorder.
Preparations
• Make sure that a disc you want to play is compatible with this recorder. See
page 160) to “Audio”.
• Set “Priority contents” (
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
1
page 79.
Press DVD.
DVD
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
2
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Playback starts from the first track of a current folder.
OPEN/CLOSE
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
Load a CD that contains MP3/WMA files.
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
REC
REC
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
Notes
• WMA tracks copy-protected cannot be played.
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT BITSTREAM/PCM jack outputs MP3/WMA sounds in the linear PCM format regardless of the
current “Audio out select” (
page 158) selection.
• You cannot change the playback speed of MP3/WMA playback.
To stop playback
On the “CONTENT MENU Audio List”
Press STOP.
If you press the PLAY button after pressing the STOP
button, playback will start from the the beginning of the
track.
1) Press the CONTENT MENU button.
The “CONTENT MENU Audio List” appears.
Current folder
e.g.
CONTENT Audio List
MENU
To pause playback
Press PAUSE.
To resume, press the PAUSE button again or press
the PLAY button.
001
MP3_0001
002
MP3_0002
003
MP3_0003
004
007
010
MP3_0004
MP3_0007
MP3_0010
005
008
011
MP3_0005
MP3_0008
MP3_0011
006
009
012
MP3_0006
MP3_0009
MP3_0012
File number
If you select this icon and press the ENTER button,
upper folders appear.
To skip tracks
During playback, press SKIP repeatedly.
: To skip forward.
: To skip backward.
e.g.
CONTENT Audio List
MENU
2 ways are available:
78
CD
1 / 1 Page
All
JPG_MP3
MP3
Selecting a track in the disc
CD
1 / 1 Page
MP3
003
MP3c
MP3_0003
Disc name
MP3a
001
004
MP3_0001
MP3_0004
MP3b
002
MP3_0002
The recorder creates temporary
folder “All”, which contains all
playable files.
Direct input of a track number
1) During playback or stop, press T.SEARCH.
An input window appears.
Search
Track
001
2) Input a track number using the number buttons
or the ADJUST button.
3) Press ENTER.
Library
To change the playback order
Editing
e.g.
Playback
Notes
• The “CONTENT MENU Autio List” cannot show all the
tracks in a disc, but only ones regarded as objects of
proper play of the disc.
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space
are not displayed.
Playable files
MP3/WMA disc compatibility with this recorder is
limited as follows:
• Playable discs:
CD-ROM, CD-R
CD-RW is not recommendable.
• Sampling Frequency / Bitrate:
WMA: 32 kHz / 48 Mbps (CBR), VBR
44.1 kHz / 48-192 Mbps (CBR), VBR
48 kHz / 128-192 Mbps (CBR), VBR
MP3: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz / 8-160 kbps (CBR),
VBR
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz / 32-320 kbps
(CBR), VBR
• CD physical format:
Mode 1, Mode 2 XA Form 1
• File system:
ISO9660 Level 1, 2 or Joliet
• File name:
A file name should be in alphabet and
numerals only, and must incorporate “MP3” or
“WMA” extension.
e.g.“********.MP3”, “********.WMA”
• Total number of folders:
Less than 256
• Total number of files:
Less than 1000
• WMA codec version:
V7, V8, V9
Recording
3) Press ENTER.
If you select a folder at step 2), repeat steps 2) and
3) until your favorite file appears.
Introduction
2) Press / / / to select a track or folder.
/
) button
Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH (
turns the pages.
1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
Quick Menu
Special playback mode
Exit
Memory
Memory list
Folder repeat
Track repeat
Track random
To shift the cursor, press the
/
buttons.
Folder repeat : To repeat the current folder.
Track repeat : To repeat the current file.
Track random : To play files in the current
folder in a random order.
Notes
• To cancel these modes, stop the playback or select the
cancel command from the Quick Menu.
Others
3) Press / to select an item, then press ENTER.
Memory list : To play favorite tracks only in
a favorite order.
Input a track number by using the number buttons
or the ADJUST button.
This recorder requires discs/recordings to meet certain
technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback
quality. Pre-recorded DVDs are automatically set to
these standards. There are many different types
of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing
MP3/WMA files). Given the fact that technology in this
area is still maturing, Toshiba cannot guarantee that all
genre of recordable discs will produce optimal playback
quality. The technical criteria set out in this owner’s
manual are meant as a guide only.
Function setup
e.g.
* This recorder supports ID3v2 (ID3 Tag Version 2) of MP3,
to display text data such as names of title and artist.
Some characters may be displayed properly.
Customers should also note that permission is required in
order to download MP3/WMA files and music from the
internet. Toshiba has no right to grant such permission.
Permission should always be sought from the copyright
owner.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows
Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in both the United
States and other countries.
79
Playback
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Checking the current status and settings
You can confirm operational status and setting details.
Operational status and setting details
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Press DISPLAY.
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
CHANNEL
DISPLAY
The following on-screen display appears. (The actual
display varies depending on the disc.)
e.g. while playing a DVD-RAM disc
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
Elapsed time of a title/
Elapsed time of a chapter Mode indicator
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Title No./
Chapter No.
SK
W
O
Playback
mode
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Operating disc
Receiving
channel
Status display
e.g.
Title
002 : 00 : 10 : 29
Chapter 0005 : 00 : 05: 15
Title
repeat
HDD
3
Stereo
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
2
Press DISPLAY again.
An expanded display appears.
(Actual display varies depending on the disc.)
DISPLAY
e.g.
REMAIN
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
Title
002 : -00 : 22 : 01
Chapter 0005 : -00 : 00 : 07
P in P
Virtual surround
DNR (Recording)
Picture Quality
Audio Quality
Audio
Audio Output
Subtitle
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Title
repeat
HDD
3
Stereo
Off
Off
SP
D/M1
1 Stereo R Original
Bitstream
– – – Off
Press DISPLAY again to turn the display off.
DISPLAY
80
Remaining time
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
Introduction
Using the time bar
The time bar shows the current progress in playback or recording.
CH
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
1
During playback or recording, press
TIME BAR.
The time bar appears. (The actual display varies
depending on the disc.)
TIME BAR
e.g. Playback
Locator (Shows the current location.)
00 : 00 : 00
Location 00 : 55 : 00:00F
Chapter division
Elapsed time
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
e.g. Recording
01 : 30 : 00
Total playing time of a current title
(In the case of a VIDEO CD or
audio CD, it shows the total
playing time of the disc.)
Locator (Shows the current location.)
Editing
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV/VIDEO
Playback
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
Recording
ENTER
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Location
00 : 30 : 00
Elapsed time
Elapsed recording time (per 30 minutes)
(Recording end time if it comes within 30
minutes.)
Library
Note
• Time display is an approximation.
00 : 18 : 00
00 : 00 : 00
Changing the location of the time bar
/ .
Function setup
While the time bar is displayed, press
The time bar shifts up and down.
Turning off the time bar
Press TIME BAR.
Others
81
Playback
Functions in the Quick Menu
Besides these examples, various other ones are introduced on respective pages for your convenience.
page 24 on how to operate the Quick Menu.
See
Repeat all ORG titles
To play repeatedly (Repeat playback)
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
You can repeat a desired section.
Repeat all PL titles
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
Special playback mode
The sub menu appears. Select the next item by
pressing the / buttons and the ENTER button.
A-B repeat
You can designate a portion in a title or track to repeat
continuously.
If you select “A-B repeat” and press the ENTER
button, the following display appears. Perform steps 1
and 2 below.
e.g.
A B
repeat
To repeat all original titles in a disc.
Set A
To repeat all playlist titles in a disc.
Cancel repeat
(in Repeat playback
mode)
To resume normal playback.
Playback of the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc stops.
Notes
• Some discs may not permit repeat operation.
• You cannot use the epeat playback function n conjunction
with the random playback function.
• If you press the STOP button during repeat playback, this
operation is canceled.
• While you are performing repeat playback on the HDD or a
DVD-RAM disc, other operations (
pages 64 to 66)
except pause play are not available.
To play in random order (Random play)
DVD-RW
DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
You can play sections in random order.
1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.
To cancel the procedure, press the
button.
1) Press ENTER at the beginning of the segment
(point A) you want to repeat.
The location of point A is memorized.
The display changes to “Set B”.
2) Press ENTER at the end of the segment
(point B).
The location of point B is memorized, and repeat
playback begins between point A and B.
2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
Special playback mode
The sub menu appears. Select the next item by
pressing the / buttons and the ENTER button.
Title random
Plays all titles in a loaded disc in random order.
Each title is played beginning from chapter 1.
Chapter random
Plays all chapters in a current title in random order.
Title repeat
To repeat the same title.
Chapter repeat
To repeat the same chapter.
Track repeat
To repeat the same track.
Disc repeat
To repeat the entire disc.
82
Track random
Plays all tracks on a loaded disc in random order.
(in Random play mode)
DVD-RW
DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
You can select 30 titles, chapters, or tracks and play
them in favorite order.
(To play contents in the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc in
favorite order, make a playlist. For details, see
page 86.)
“Editing” on
1) During playback or stop, press QUICK MENU.
Special playback mode
The sub menu appears. Select the next item by
pressing the / buttons and the ENTER button.
e.g.
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
Memory repeat
(in memory playback
mode)
To repeat a current memory playback.
Notes
• Some discs may not permit memory playback operation.
• Inputting numbers of titles, chapters or tracks that a disc
does not contain will result in error.
• You cannot program/change selections during memory
playback. To change selections, cancel memory playback
by pressing the STOP button.
• When you turn off the power, the selected memory is
erased.
• You can exit the memory playback display by pressing the
O button.
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
CT
Function setup
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
(in memory playback
Library
Memory list
If you select this and press the ENTER button, the
following display appears. Perform the steps below.
Memory release
mode)
To resume normal playback.
Editing
2) Press / to select “Special playback mode”,
then press ENTER.
Memory
(in normal playback
mode)
To display an entry box for one program selection.
Playback
To play in favorite order (Memory playback)
3) Press ENTER.
Memory playback starts.
Recording
Notes
• Some discs may not permit random playback operation.
• You cannot use the random playback function in
conjunction with the memory playback function.
• You cannot use the random playback function in
conjunction with the repeat playback function.
• Pressing the STOP button during operation cancels
random playback.
2) Press / to select the next box, then perform
step 1).
To select another chapter in the same title, you do
not need to select the title number.
Repeat these steps if necessary.
You can program up to 30 selections into memory.
Introduction
Cancel random
Resumes normal playback.
Others
1) Input numbers of titles, chapters, or tracks by
using the number buttons, in favorite order.
Input each 3-digit number.
To input a 1- or 2-digit number, first input 0.
(e.g. “0”, “0”, “3”.)
To cancel the numbers, press the CLEAR button.
To input a chapter number, press the / buttons
to shift the cursor.
83
Playback
Functions in the Quick Menu (Continued)
To display the current bit rate
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press /
ENTER.
to select “Bit rate”, then press
Bit rate
Note
• To turn off the bit rate display, select this item again.
To check information on a title
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
1) During playback, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select “Title information”, then
press ENTER.
Title information
To exit the Quick Menu
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Press QUICK MENU again.
or
Press
/
to select “Exit”, then press ENTER.
Exit
84
CD
Editing
You can create your own movie from your assembled
scenes. Save your favorite videos in DVD discs.
Before editing
Creating chapters
Playlist editing
Creating thumbnails
Before dubbing
High speed Library dubbing
Dubbing selected items
Rate conversion dubbing
Line-U dubbing
Deleting selected items
Combine Original titles
Creating a DVD-Video using
DVD-R/RW
DVD-Video finalizing process
DV recording
Editing
Before editing
Be sure to read before performing any editing.
For better use the HDD of this recorder
When you save necessary scenes from recorded contents, it may not be a good method to delete unnecessary
portions from a recorded title in the HDD, then copy the remainder to a DVD-RAM disc.
Repeating this method increases blank spaces in the HDD, on which contents will be recorded discontinuously
(fragmentation in the HDD), resulting in slowdown of the system or incomplete deleting operation, in the worst case,
the system may refuse any commands for play or recording, to protect the damaged HDD.
To delete unnecessary scenes from a title to save, first make a Playlist (virtual title) by collecting necessary scenes,
then copy the Playlist to change it into a new title, finally delete the original one. This method is more simple and can
save your time and reduce possibility of such fragmentation troubles of the HDD.
To avoid HDD fragmentations, it is also recommended that you execute periodically deletion of all titles in the HDD or
initialization of the HDD. Before initializing the HDD, be sure to copy necessary contents to DVD-RAM discs, because
page 140) data are also recorded in the HDD. If you do not want to
initializing erases all data in the HDD. Library (
erase them, copy them into DVD-RAM discs before initializing the HDD. Load the backup DVD-RAM disc into the
recorder after initializing the HDD, copy the data back to the HDD.
86
Introduction
Editing on this recorder
Creating chapters
➔
Programming a Playlist
➔
Dub (Copy) the Playlist (this will create an Original
title of the desired scenes)
Playback
Editing is executed by a title and a chapter. Titles and chapters are classified into “Original” and “Playlist.” First, specify
a desired scene by dividing a title (Original) into chapters. Then compile the necessary chapters (Original) in desired
order by programming a Playlist. Then dub (copy) the Playlist on the same disc. This creates a title (Original).
Refer to the following examples about “Playlist” and “Original.”
Recording
Basic steps of editing
Example: Creating your own music compilation by collecting songs from music programs you record from Monday
to Friday.
Editing
You can create one title for one recording.
Segment of
songs
Monday
Tuesday
Library
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Function setup
Original title 1
(including one Original chapter)
In the example above, five titles are created, as you recorded programs five times from Monday to Friday. The
content you recorded is called “Title (Original)”
All chapters in a title (Original) are chapters (Original).
Division of chapter
Chapter 1
Others
Specify the range (a favorite song) you need in
each title (Original).
To specify the range, create a chapter. A segment of
a song becomes one chapter by creating divisions in
a chapter at the beginning and end of a song. In the
example to the right, three chapters (Original) are
created in one title (Original).
Division of chapter
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Monday
Title (Original) 1
(including three chapters (Original))
87
Editing
Before editing (Continued)
Compile chapters in a desired order.
You can select any chapter or order of chapters, as
you want. Also you can assign a title to multiple
chapters.
Title (Original) 1
(including three chapters (Original))
Chapter 1
Each element to be compiled is called a part. In the
example to the right, the three chapters in
Wednesday, Friday, and Monday are the parts.
When compiled, the source chapter (Original)
remains as it is in the title (Original).
Chapter 2
3
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
A new part is not created by copying the source
chapter (Original). It does not contain actual recorded
content but only exists as an informational sub-set of
the chapter name and the playback order (in the right
example, the chapter names are “Monday,
Wednesday, and Friday” and the playback order is
“Wednesday→Friday→Monday”).
For actual playback, the contents of the source
chapter (Original) are played. Basically, it is a list for
the recorder to go and find the content.
You can create a part from the Original as many
times as you want and you can make different titles
with the same parts by changing the combination or
order.
For parts, you can use not only chapters like in the
example, but also titles (Original) and other Playlist.
Chapter 3
1
Thursday
Friday
2
Chapter
(Playlist) 1
Chapter
(Playlist) 2
Chapter
(Playlist) 3
Title (Playlist) 1
(including three chapters (Playlist))
When title (Playlist) 1 is played, 1 ,
2 and 3 are played in order.
You can play the actual recorded content, such as titles (Original) and chapters (Original), or by managing the
Originals and parts, you can virtually create a variety of titles without increasing the use of disc space.
These virtual titles or chapters are called “Title (Playlist)” or “Chapter (Playlist)” respectively.
In order to differentiate titles (Playlist) from titles (Original), an Original is displayed on screen as “ORG” and a Playlist
is displayed as “PL”.
88
You are now converting the virtual file (playlist) into an
actual file that will become a new original file.
Playlist
Chapter
(Playlist) 1
Chapter
(Playlist) 2
Chapter
(Playlist) 3
Recording
If you just want to play the compiled chapters in
desired order, you only play the Playlist. If you want to
delete a title (Original) which contains unnecessary
chapters, be sure to dub (copy) the Playlist and make
it into a title (Original).
Introduction
Make the compiled chapters into a title (Original).
(Dubbing)
Title (Playlist) 1
Dubbing (Copying)
Title
Chapter
(Original) 2
Chapter
(Original) 3
Playback
Chapter
(Original) 1
Title (Original) 1
page 95).
Library
Proceed to the practical operations.
page 90) and “Playlist editing (Collecting desired scenes)” (
See “Creating chapters” (
page 106).
For the dubbing procedure, see “High speed Library dubbing” (
Editing
Notes
• A title (Playlist) or a chapter (Playlist) is based on a title (Original) or a chapter (Original). Therefore changing or deleting a
title (Original) or a chapter (Original) will affect the related title (Playlist) or chapter (Playlist).
• Some recorded content cannot be edited (for example, a title including still images).
• The boundary of the title with unnecessary part deleted and titles (Playlist) having different parts cannot be played back
seamlessly (without break).
Function setup
Others
89
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM
Creating chapters
A recording makes 1 title, which includes 1 chapter. By dividing it into several chapters, it will be easier
to access a desired scene, and your editing or playback will be much easier.
To create chapters in a title, insert a chapter mark. Playback the content, locate a point where you want to divide, then
press the CHP DIVIDE button. You can insert a chapter mark also while recording, by pressing the CHP DIVIDE
button. (A chapter will also be placed in the recording when you pause.)
The point divides the chapter (into two). You can create multiple chapters by repeating the above operation.
Notes
• Chapters cannot be created in the following modes:
Dubbing / Fast-reverse, Fast-forward / Slow-motion
• You cannot divide a title of a DVD-R/RW disc into chapters. It is possible to create chapters in a DVD-R/RW disc by pressing
the CHP DIVIDE button during recording at the desired points, or by selecting an option that inserts chapter marks
automatically during recording at regular intervals. (
page 162)
If you want to modify the chapter division, or want to place a chapter mark more precisely monitoring the
frame counter, follow the procedures below.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
During stop, playback or recording, press
CONTENT MENU.
The CONTENT MENU Title List appears.
AUDIO
CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press
ENTER
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
3
to select a title.
• To go to the next or previous page, press the
/
) button.
PICTURE SEARCH (
• To select a chapter, first highlight the title that contains
button.
the chapter you want, then press the
The display changes to “CONTENT MENU Chapter
List”.
button
To go back to the title display, press the
again.
Press QUICK MENU.
QUICK MENU
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
PICTURE SEARCH
HDD/DVD
90
/
The Quick Menu appears.
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV/VIDEO
/
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
/
e.g.
CONTENT Title List
Quick Menu
MENU
1 / 2 Page
HDD
HDD Title
: information
2004/06/08 07:00
Create thumbnail
am TV:4
High speed dubbing
(0:53:45)
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter functionOriginal
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
Edit functon
2004/06/12 09:00
Special playback
pm mode
TV:3
Save captured images(0:52:40)
Disc informationOriginal
Display changeover
2004/07/12 11:00
Specific page
pmjump
TV:4
Title delete
(0:30:08)
Exit
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press / to select “Chapter function”, then
press ENTER.
The Submenu appears.
CHANNEL
e.g.
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
REC MENU EDIT MENU
HDD
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
Playback
SK
IP
SL
1 / 2 Page
Edit functon
2004/06/12 09:00
Special playback
pm mode
TV:3
Save captured images(0:52:40)
Disc informationOriginal
Display changeover
2004/07/12 11:00
Specific page
pmjump
TV:4
Title delete
(0:30:08)
Exit
Original
CONTENT MENU
W
O
CONTENT Title List
MENU
Quick Menu
HDD Title
: information
Chapter editing
2004/06/08 07:00
Create thumbnail
Auto chapter create2004/06/08 11:00
am TV:4
pm TV:6
High speed dubbing
(0:29:50)
(0:53:45)
Rate conversion dubbing
Original
Chapter functionOriginal
EASY
NAVI
LIBRARY
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
E
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
5
Press / to select “Chapter editing”, then
press ENTER.
The EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display appears.
e.g.
QUICK MENU
REC
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
EDIT Chapter Editing
MENU
HDD
Fishing Guide
ENTER
Original
Aspect Ratio 4:3
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Chapter:0001
00:54:30
B
6
Press PLAY to start playback.
PLAY
PICTURE SEARCH
SKIP
Locate a scene where you want to insert a chapter mark.
You can use the following buttons.
PICTURE SEARCH, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE,
FRAME/ADJUST, etc.
Others
PAUSE
FRAME
SLOW
Title:004
00:00:00
P in P
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM
Library
Location 00:00:00:03F
Divide
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
The locator shows the current position on the time bar.
And the live video plays in the upper left.
• To access other chapters:
Press the / buttons to move to the thumbnail
display, then press the / buttons to select a
desired thumbnail.
To go to the next page, press the PICTURE SEARCH
button.
• You can confirm the first and last scenes of a chapter.
Select a thumbnail and press the ENTER button.
3 seconds of the first and last scenes are played.
91
Editing
Creating chapters (Continued)
7
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
At a point where you want to make a chapter
division, press PAUSE.
The picture pauses.
CHANNEL
PAUSE
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
Fishing Guide
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
Original
EASY
NAVI
SK
CH
E
SE
AM
AR
FR
DJ
US
RE
T
PAUSE
STOP
TU
PI C
PLAY
8
Press /
ENTER.
QUICK MENU
REC
Chapter:0001
00:54:30
B
ENTER
/A
Title:004
00:00:00
IP
SL
CONTENT MENU
W
O
Aspect Ratio 4:3
Location 00:00:21:24F
Divide
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
HDD
Chapter Editing
DVD
ENTER
/
/
to select “Divide,” then press
A chapter division is created at the selected location,
and the first scene of the new chapter is registered as a
chapter thumbnail.
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
HDD
Chapter Editing
Fishing Guide
Original
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
Aspect Ratio 4:3
Location 00:00:21:24F
Divide
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
P in P
Title:004
00:00:00
PROGRESSIVE
Chapter:0001
00:54:30
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
B
9
Repeat steps 6 to 8.
Locations of chapter division are indicated by the markers on the
time bar.
To erase a chapter division, see “Merging chapters” (
10
page 94).
When all chapter divisions have been made,
press .
The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the
chapter divisions on the time bar.
When complete, the CONTENT MENU returns.
92
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
Chapter Editing
Title
1
Merge
Divide
1
2
3
4
5
Edit Functions
Playlist editing
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
3) Press / to select “Chapter break edit
mode”, then press ENTER.
4) Press /
ENTER.
to select the item, then press
“by frame (VR mode)”
The chapter mark shifts by one frame.
For contents which will be copied to DVD-RAM
discs.
“by GOP (Video mode)”
The chapter mark shifts by a GOP (about 0.5
second), which is a unit of editing in DVD-Video
format.
For contents which wiil be copied to DVD-R/RW.
5) Press / to select a chapter whose
beginning you want to shift.
6) Press FRAME (II / II) repeatedly until a
desired scene appears.
Select a point while monitoring the thumbnail,
which changes as you press the button.
To operate other chapters, press the / buttons
to select another, then follow the above steps.
7) When complete, press QUICK MENU, and
select “Chapter break edit mode off (by
frame)” or “Chapter Break Edit Mode off (by
GOP)” then press ENTER.
The recorder exits the adjusting mode.
Notes
• You cannot shift a chapter mark beyond the adjacent
chapter marks or a logical gap on recorded data within a
chapter.
• Shifting a chapter mark restores a thumbnail to the
beginning of a chapter. This may occur also on the
previous chapter depending on the data condition.
Others
1) Perform steps 1 to 4 on
2) Press QUICK MENU.
Function setup
You can create chapter marks from the beginning of
a title at regular intervals automatically. (Chapter
marks are added to those already existing.)
This is convenient for long programs, such as live
sports games.
page 90 to 91.
Library
Creating chapters automatically when
recording
1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on
Editing
• To exit the “EDIT MENU Main Menu”, press the EDIT
MENU button.
• Making chapters in a title (Original) does not affect the
related titles (Playlist).
• There may be a small difference between a location you
marked and a chapter division actually played.
• Pausing a recording automatically creates a chapter
division.
• During relay recording (
page 48), a chapter division is
automatically created at the start point of relay record.
• During an A-B recording (
page 48), if the recorder
has to record all content onto the HDD, a chapter division
is automatically created at a point that corresponds to the
beginning of side of a DVD-RAM disc.
• If you create chapters in a title which is stored in the HDD
and copy the title to a DVD-R/RW, the chapter divisions
may shift.
You can adjust positions of chapter marks. You can
shift the beginning of a chapter currently selected.
Playback
Chapters can be divided on frame
basis. Chapters can be merged and
assigned names.
Source
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
Editing chapter break
Recording
e.g.
Introduction
Notes
• This recorder supports a limited number of chapters on a
disc. If exceeded, a message appears. In this event,
reduce the number of chapters by merging chapters. (
page 94)
• The “EDIT MENU Chapter Editing” can also be viewed by
selecting “Chapter Editing” from the “EDIT MENU Main
Menu”.
pages 90 to 91.
2) Press / to select “Auto chapter create”,
then press ENTER.
3) Press / to select a chapter division
interval, then press ENTER.
Chapter divisions are automatically marked at the
selected intervals.
93
Editing
Creating chapters (Continued)
Merging chapters
1) Perform steps 1 to 5 on
pages 90 to 91, to
view the EDIT MENU Chapter Editing display.
2) Press / / / to highlight a chapter.
Pressing the PICTURE SEARCH button can
access preceding or following pages.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
Chapter Create
Quick Menu
Chapter break edit mode
Merge with previous cptr
Merge with following cptr
Merge all chapters
Auto chapter create
Edit chapter name
Exit
00:00:00
HDD
2003/06/10 05:09pm CH:3
Original
Aspect Ratio 4:3
Location 00:00:00:03F
Divide
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
00:54:30
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
B
4) Press / to select an item.
Merge with previous cptr:
To delete the chapter division between the selected
chapter and the previous one.
Merge with following cptr:
To delete the chapter division between the selected
chapter and the succeeding one.
Merge all chapters:
To merge all chapters in the title.
5) Press ENTER.
e.g. When “Merge with previous cptr” is selected:
The selected chapter is merged into the previous
chapter and its thumbnail is erased.
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
Chapter Editing
HDD
2003/06/10 05:09pm CH:3
Original
Aspect Ratio 4:3
Location 00:00:00:03F
Divide
To create new chapter, select
desired start point via remote.
To set, press enter.
00:00:00
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
B
94
Notes
• To turn off the EDIT MENU Main Menu, press the EDIT
MENU button.
• When chapters are merged, the numerical value of
following chapters will decrease correspondingly.
• Merging chapters does not affect the related titles
(Playlist). You can also merge chapters in the title (Playlist).
In this case, the title (Original) is not affected.
• You can access the feature of merging chapters also from
the Quick Menu on the CONTENT MENU Chapter List.
00:54:30
Naming a chapter
1) From the EDIT MENU Chapter Editing, select a
chapter which you want to name.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press / / / to select “Edit Chapter
Name”, then press ENTER.
A keyboard appears.
Enter a name following the on-screen icon guides.
Notes
• There is a limit to the number of chapters which can be
named. If exceeded, a message appears.
• You can also access the keyboard to enter a chapter name
by selecting a chapter with the PICTURE SEARCH button
on the CONTENT MENU Title Information, and by
selecting “Edit chapter name” from the Quick Menu on the
CONTENT MENU Chapter List.
• You can change chapter names also on a DVD-R/RW disc,
if the disc is not finalized yet.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM
Playlist editing (Collecting desired scenes)
Introduction
Create a “Playlist” to omit unnecessary scenes for dubbing, or compile desired scenes.
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During stop, playback or recording, press
CONTENT MENU.
The CONTENT MENU Title List appears.
CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
Recording
1
OPEN/CLOSE
Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
ENTER
e.g.
E
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
Edit functon
2004/06/12 09:00
Special playback
pm mode
TV:3
Save captured images(0:52:40)
Disc informationOriginal
Display changeover
2004/07/12 11:00
Specific page
pmjump
TV:4
Title delete
(0:30:08)
Exit
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
CHANNEL
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
3
Press / to select “Edit function”, then
press ENTER.
The sub menu appears.
e.g.
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
CONTENT Title List
Quick Menu
MENU
ENTER
HDD/DVD
1 / 2 Page
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM
HDD
Library
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
1 / 2 Page
HDD Title
: information
2004/06/08 07:00
Create thumbnail
am TV:4
High speed dubbing
(0:53:45)
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter functionOriginal
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
CONTENT Title List
MENU
Quick Menu
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
QUICK MENU
/A
Playback
2
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
HDD
HDD Title
: information
Playlist editing
2004/06/08 07:00Original title combination
2004/06/08 11:00
Create thumbnail
am TV:4
pm TV:6
High speed dubbing
Playlist(Mon-Fri)
(0:53:45)
(0:29:50)
Rate conversion dubbing
Playlist(everyweek)
Original
Chapter functionOriginal
Edit functon
2004/06/12 09:00
Special playback
pm mode
TV:3
Save captured images(0:52:40)
Disc informationOriginal
Display changeover
2004/07/12 11:00
Specific page
pmjump
TV:4
Title delete
(0:30:08)
Exit
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
Others
(Continued)
95
Editing
Playlist editing (Continued)
4
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press / to select “Playlist editing”, then
press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Playlist editing” appears.
CHANNEL
e.g.
EDIT Playlist editing
HDD
MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
Source:Title
Original
Object :Title
PlayList
ENTER
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Entire time:
Title:
B
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
U
IC T
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
5
Press
/
/
To select between titles and chapters, press the
P
PLAY
e.g.
EDIT Playlist editing
HDD
MENU
ENTER
Source:Title
Original
Object :Title
PlayList
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
to select a title or chapter.
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
/
Start
A
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
Entire time:
Title:
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
6
Start
A
B
Press ENTER.
A cursor appears, indicating the point where the
selected item will be inserted.
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT Playlist editing
HDD
MENU
Source:Title
Original
Object :Title
PlayList
Cursor
Entire time:
Title:
B
96
A
Start
button.
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press / to select a point where you want to
insert the item, then press ENTER.
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
7
OPEN/CLOSE
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press the ENTER button.
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
The selected part is inserted at the location of the
cursor.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
e.g.
REC MENU EDIT MENU
HDD
Original
Object :Title
PlayList
Playback
Source:Title
SK
W
O
IP
SL
EDIT Playlist editing
MENU
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
DJ
US
T
PI C
T
PAUSE
STOP
Title: 2004/05/07 10:30am
Start
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
8
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to insert items.
9
When all items have been inserted, press .
To cancel the selection, see “Canceling selection of a part”
page 98).
(
The recorder displays a message, and starts saving the
Playlist.
Function setup
CHANNEL
ZOOM
Entire time: 00:13:45
A
Library
TV
B
PLAY
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV/VIDEO
E
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
UR
Editing
E
/A
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
When complete, the CONTENT MENU returns.
97
Others
Notes
• You can access the “EDIT MENU Playlist Editing” also by selecting “Playlist editing” on the EDIT MENU.
• If you delete titles and chapters (Original), the corresponding titles and chapters (Playlist) are also deleted. Contrarily, if you
delete titles and chapters (Playlist), the corresponding titles and chapters (Original) are not deleted.
• Playback may pause if a gap between the content is played.
• There may be a small difference between the chapter boundary and the actual playback picture.
• A title or chapter which is being edited cannot be selected as an item.
• You cannot add a title of still pictures, or a title or a chapter which contains both still and moving pictures, to a playlist.
• By copying (dubbing) a Playlist, a title (Original) of the same contents is created.
• You cannot program a Playlist of contents recorded on a DVD-R/RW disc. To make a Plailist using contents of DVD-RW
discs, copy them to the HDD beforehand.
• Down arrow on the thumbnails means: Orange: This title already selected. Green trimmed: Some chapters in this title already
selected. Green: This chapter already selected.
• A black thumbnail with “Recording” means that the title is being recorded or its recording will start within 15 seconds. This
thumbnail cannot start playback.
Editing
Playlist editing (Continued)
Canceling selection of a part
1) From the EDIT MENU Playlist editing, press
/ / / to select a part to cancel.
Note
• You cannot edit a title (Playlist) of still pictures, or a title
(Playlist) which contains both still and moving pictures.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
3) Press / to select “Cancel selected title”,
then press ENTER.
The part you have selected is canceled.
Confirming the first and last scenes of a part or
a Playlist
You can play the first and last 3 seconds of a scene
(Preview). (If a title contains several chapters, the first
and last scenes of the chapters are also played.)
Preview of a part:
page 96, select a title or a
1) At step 5 on
chapter, then press QUICK MENU.
2) Press /
ENTER.
1) In play or stop mode of a Playlist title, press
EDIT MENU.
The EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
2) Press / / / to select “Playlist editing,”
then press ENTER.
The EDIT MENU Playlist editing appears.
3) Press / / / to select “Start” then press
ENTER.
The areas of title name and part selection become
blank.
4) Following the procedures outlined on
96, make a Playlist.
page
to select “Preview”, then press
Naming a title (Playlist)
Preview of all parts:
1) Move the cursor to an any part (in the lower
area), then press the QUICK MENU button.
2) Press / to select “Preview all playlists”, then
press ENTER.
1) At step 5 on
page 96, select a title or a
chapter, then press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select “Title information” then
press ENTER.
Correcting a Playlist
You can add or delete parts to correct a Playlist.
1) From the CONTENT MENU, select a Playlist to
correct.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
3) Press / to select “Playlist re-editing” and
then press ENTER.
The EDIT MENU Playlist editing appears.
Follow the procedure from steps 5 on
add or delete parts as necessary.
1) From the EDIT MENU Playlist editing, move a
cursor to the lower side (selected parts) then
press QUICK MENU.
2) Press / to select “Edit title name,” then
press ENTER.
A keyboard appears.
3) Following the procedures outlined on
30, enter a title name.
Confirming the title information
98
Using a part in a Playlist also in another Playlist
page 96,
page
Note
• You can name a title also while viewing its information.
From the CONTENT MENU Title List, select a title and
press the QUICK MENU button then select “Title
Information” by the / buttons and the ENTER button.
Further press the QUICK MENU button, and select “Edit
title name” by the / buttons and the ENTER button.
Introduction
Making a Playlist of recorded contents where
starting times are the same (i.e. daily or weekly
recordings)
This will help to sort serials.
Recording
1) From the CONTENT MENU Title List, press
QUICK MENU.
2) Press /
ENTER.
3) Press
/
to select “Edit function”, then press
to select the item.
Playback
“Playlist(Mon-Fri)”
To sort out programs recorded on the same time on
Monday to Friday to make a Playlist.
“Playlist(every week)”
To sort out programs recorded on the same time of
the same day of the week to make a Playlist.
4) Press ENTER.
Editing
Notes
• Only titles (Original) can be sorted.
• The maximum number of sorted titles is 99.
• If you modify the recording start time or date of one of the
recorded serials, the title will not be sorted out. Contrarily,
any program can be sorted if its channel, recording start
time and date are modified as the same as others.
• “Playlist(Mon-Fri)” can sort titles even if they are not
complete 5 collections of Monday to Friday, on condition
that they have the same channel and recording start time,
and any recording date except Saturday and Sunday.
Library
Function setup
Others
99
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Creating thumbnails (Changing the picture on the CONTENT MENU)
You can register your favorite scene as a thumbnail displayed on the CONTENT MENU.
On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not available.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During stop or playback, press CONTENT
MENU.
The CONTENT MENU Title List appears.
CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
e.g.
DVD
CONTENT Title List
MENU
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
1 / 2 Page
HDD
HDD :
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
ENTER
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
Pressing the HDD or DVD button can switch the drives.
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
2
Press / / / to select a title whose
thumbnail you want to change.
QUICK MENU
REC
ENTER
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
• To go to the next or previous page, press the
/
) button.
PICTURE SEARCH (
• To select a chapter, select a title and press the
button. The Chapter List appears.
button again, you can return to the
By pressing the
Title List.
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
3
Press QUICK MENU.
QUICK MENU
The Quick Menu appears.
e.g.
CONTENT Title List
Quick Menu
MENU
PICTURE SEARCH
HDD/DVD
100
1 / 2 Page
HDD
HDD Title
: information
2004/06/08 07:00
Create thumbnail
am TV:4
High speed dubbing
(0:53:45)
Rate conversion dubbing
Chapter functionOriginal
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
Edit functon
2004/06/12 09:00
Special playback
pm mode
TV:3
Save captured images(0:52:40)
Disc informationOriginal
Display changeover
2004/07/12 11:00
Specific page
pmjump
TV:4
Title delete
(0:30:08)
Exit
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
Press / to select “Create thumbnail”
(or “Create CHP thumbnail” if selected a
chapter at step 2), then press ENTER.
The CNTENT MENU Create Thumbnail display
appears.
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
ENTER
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
Create Thumbnail
HDD
EASY
NAVI
2004/06/08 11:00pm Ch:6
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Playback
Location 00:00:00:03F
SK
W
O
(0:29:50)
Original
Select desired thumbnail image via
remote. To set, press enter.
IP
SL
LIBRARY
00:00:00
Title:002
00:54:30
Chapter:0001
E
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
5
B
Press PLAY to start playback.
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
6
At the point where you want to capture a
thumbnail image, press PAUSE.
e.g.
CONTENT
MENU
Create Thumbnail
HDD
PAUSE
2004/06/08 11:00pm Ch:6
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
(0:29:50)
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM
Locate a scene you want to capture as a thumbnail.
You can use the following buttons.
PICTURE SEARCH, FRAME, SLOW, SKIP, PAUSE,
etc.
Library
REMAIN
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
Original
Location 00:06:25:23F
Select desired thumbnail image via
remote. To set, press enter.
PICTURE SEARCH
FRAME
SLOW
00:00:00
SKIP
Chapter:0001
00:29:50
B
7
Press ENTER.
Others
Note
• There may be a small difference
between a thumbnail made on the
Create Thumbnail display and that
displayed in the CONTENT MENU.
Operation with the PICTURE
SEARCH button may extend the
difference.
Title:002
The CONTENT MENU returns. The selected scene is
displayed as a thumbnail.
ENTER
e.g.
CONTENT Title List
MENU
1 / 2 Page
HDD
HDD :
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
101
Editing
Creating thumbnails (Continued)
Notes
• You cannot create thumbnails of chapters in a title that
contains a still picture.
• If you create a chapter thumbnail, and then shift the
page 93) or record or edit the disc on
chapter mark (
other devices, the chapter thumbnail may return to the top
of the chapter.
102
Editing
Before dubbing
This recorder has the following dubbing functions.
High speed dubbing
You can copy recorded contents without changing
the picture and sound quality.
“High speed” means the dubbing time is shorter
than the actual time of the content.
Use this function on the purposes such as the
followings:
– when you copy a whole title to a DVD-RAM/R/
RW disc.
Use this function when you unify the compatibility
of several titles and contents all at once.
– when you copy contents recorded in DVD-VR
mode from a DVD-RW to the HDD.
Line-U dubbing
You can record pictures recorded which is being
played.
High speed dubbing of several contents - “Dub
selected items”
You can select titles and chapters and copy them
all at once.
Use this function when you want to copy contents
in DVD-R/RW recorded on other device, which
cannot show thumbnails in a CONTENT MENU
Title List, to the HDD.
Editing
All the above functions can copy data as original
digital signals. “Rate conversion dubbing” and “LineU dubbing”, however, needs data processing and
may deteriorate the original picture and sound
quality. Also, it is not possible to improve the picture
and sound quality by the Rate conversion dubbing at
increased bit rate.
Library
– when you convert a Playlist into an Original title
(produce an Original title from a Playlist)
Rate conversion dubbing
You can copy a content, changing its data size to a
different data one with which the content was
recorded.
Use this function on the purposes such as the
followings:
To
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HDD
DVD-RAM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVD-R/RW
(Not finalized yet)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVD-RAM
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
HDD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DVD-R/RW
No
No
No
No
No
DVD-RAM
DVD-R/RW
High speed
Library
dubbing of
several parts
Rate
conversion
dubbing
Rate
conversion
dubbing of
several parts
Line-U
dubbing
Others
From
High speed
Library
dubbing
Function setup
– When you have recorded a content on the HDD
at a high rate (“MN (Manual)”), and you cannot
copy it to a DVD-RAM disc because the data size
is too large. (→ Reduce the data size.)
•
•
•
•
Playback
Rate conversion dubbing of several parts
You can select titles and chapters and change the
data size and copy them all at once.
Recording
– When you recorded a content while “DVD
page 162) was set to
compatible mode” (
“Off”, and you cannot copy it to a DVD-R/RW in
the DVD-Video format; or when a DVD-RAM
disc was recorded with the other equipment
which is not compatible with this recorder’s
recording format, and you want to copy it to a
DVD-R/RW (→ Set “DVD compatible mode” to
“Main” or “SAP”.)
Dubbing operations
Introduction
You can dub (copy or move) contents recorded in the HDD or DVD-RAM/R/RW, between HDD and DVD-RAM
drive or within the same drives.
The following contains information and notes about dubbing. Read carefully before dubbing.
It is not possible to copy to a DVD-RW of DVD-VR mode.
“High speed dubbing” between the HDD and a DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment is not possible.
“High speed dubbing” to a finalized DVD-R/RW is not possible.
“Line-U dubbing” using a DVD-R/RW which was recorded on other equipment and is not finalized yet is not possible.
103
Editing
Before dubbing (Continued)
“Copy” and “Move”
This recorder’s “Dubbing” has the following two
definitions:
Copy:
The original program remains after the operation is
completed.
Move:
The moved program will be erased from the original
location after the operation is completed.
Whether or not you select either command depends
entirely on the given situation. The command may be
predetermined in some situations.
You cannot “move” contents in the following situations.
(Instead, you will want to “copy” them.)
page 50).
• The content is protected (
• A specified portion of the title (chapter) is copyprotected, in which case, you cannot move from
DVD-RAM to the HDD.
page 87) Only
• You cannot move a Playlist. (
copying is permitted. When you copy a Playlist to a
disc, it will be treated an Original on the disc. The
original Playlist does not change to an Original.
Also, you cannot “move” or “copy” contents in the
following situations:
• The recorded content contains a program that
permits a single copy only.
• The title (Playlist) contains a portion that prohibits
copying. Edit the title from the Original and create a
new Playlist.
104
Notes
• If either the HDD or DVD-RAM is not in optimum physical
condition, an error may occur when you execute “Move”
and some titles or chapters may be lost. If you want to
“Move” non-copy-protected titles and chapters, it is
recommended for safety that you first “Copy” them to the
opposite drive and confirm they have been copied properly.
Then delete the titles and chapters to which you have
executed “Move”.
• The recorder cannot copy/move the following discs:
DVD-VIDEO
VIDEO CD
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
• If you cannot copy/move for some other reason, such as
insufficient disc capacity, etc., a message will appear on
screen. In such a case, follow the instructions in the
message.
• Depending on the content, associated information such as
data management may not be copied/moved.
• You cannot copy/move titles containing still pictures.
• Dubbing to DVD-R/RW may divide the original title
depending on the contents. Also, the DVD-Video format
page 122) may shift thumbnails.
recording (
• A part with aspect ratio 16:9 recorded at bit rate 1.4Mbps
cannot be dubbed to a DVD-R/RW. Change the aspect
ratio to 4:3.
• “High speed dubbing” (
page 106) and “Dub selected
items” (
page 108) procedures always comply with
“Aspect ratio(Video mode)” setting (
page 162).
Introduction
Recording and playback during a dubbing
Dubbing process by “High speed dubbing” and “Dub selected items” procedures will allow you to make a recording
or playback of other titles.
HDD
DVD
Playback
Recording
Playback
Recording
Recording
HDD
DVD
DVD
Available
Available
Not available
Not available
DVD
HDD
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
HDD
HDD
Not available
Not available
Available
Available
DVD
DVD
Available
Available
Not available
Not available
Playback
HDD
Editing
Notes
• Timer programmed recording have priority over other operations. Dubbing may be stopped if a timer program recording
starts.
• While recording during dubbing, the CONTENT MENU and the LIBRARY MENU cannot appear.
• Playing a recorded title while recording another on the same disc (
page 36), is not possible while dubbing.
Library
Function setup
Others
105
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
High speed Library dubbing (Dubbing only a specified part)
This section explains how to dub a spefific title or chapter. To select several parts and dub them all at
page 108.
once, refer to
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During playback or stop, press CONTENT
MENU.
The CONTENT MENU Title List appears.
CHANNEL
CONTENT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
e.g.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
IP
SL
SK
W
O
1 / 2 Page
HDD
HDD :
EASY
NAVI
LIBRARY
CONTENT Title List
MENU
2004/06/08 07:00
am TV:4
(0:53:45)
Original
2004/06/08 11:00
pm TV:6
(0:29:50)
Original
2004/06/12 09:00
pm TV:3
(0:52:40)
Original
2004/07/12 11:00
pm TV:4
(0:30:08)
Original
2004/07/11 07:00
am TV:8
(0:54:30)
Original
2004/07/12 09:00
pm TV:10
(0:51:28)
Original
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
U
IC T
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
P
PLAY
2
Press / / / to select a part (a title or
chapter) to copy or move.
QUICK MENU
REC
ENTER
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
• You can go forward/back to pages by pressing the
/
) button.
PICTURE SEARCH (
You can jump to a page by specifying the page
number.
Press the QUICK MENU button, select “Specific page
jump”. Use the ADJUST button to change the page
number.
• To select a chapter, highlight a title and press the
button. If you press the button again, the title list reappears.
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
3
Press QUICK MENU then select “High speed
dubbing” by pressing / from the Quick
Menu, then press ENTER.
QUICK MENU
The “CONTENT MENU High Speed Library Dubbing”
appears.
e.g.
ADJUST
CONTENT High Speed Library Dubbing
MENU
2004/06/10 09:00pm TV:4
PICTURE SEARCH
(0:52:40)
Original
Copy
(Saves Original)
ENTER
Move
(Deletes Original)
Same Disc
(Saves Original)
106
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
Press
Disc”.
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
ENTER
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
CH
E
SE
AM
AR
FR
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
5
Press ENTER.
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
P in P
QUICK MENU
TV
PROGRESSIVE
Copying starts.
The job progress is displayed on the screen and the
front panel display.
When the job finishes, the graph disappears and the
buzzer sounds.
Library
ENTER
REMAIN
Editing
DJ
Copy:
After the operation is completed, a specified part will
remain on the disc where it was previously located.
Move:
A part will move to the opposite disc and will be erased
from the disc where it was previously located.
Same Disc:
A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied
part will become another title.
This operation is useful to change a Playlist to Original.
“Copy” or “Move” is automatically selected in the
following cases.
Copy:
When a specified title (or chapter) is a Playlist.
When a specified title (or chapter) is locked (
page 50).
Move:
When a specified title (or chapter) is copy-protected.
ENTER
/A
to select “Copy”, “Move” or “Same
Playback
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
/
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
Notes
A title or a chapter becomes a title by being copied.
“Same Disc” job using a DVD-RAM disc will take a longer time.
“Same Disc” is not available on DVD-R/RW.
“Move” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW.
Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.
For a copy-once permitted content, only moving from the HDD to a DVD-RAM disc is available. Executing this will delete the
original content in the HDD, and the one moved to a DVD-RAM will not be able to moved or copied.
• “High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.
• If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on
the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All
HDD titles delete” (
page 164).
To cancel copying halfway through the
operation
1) During copying, press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Notes
• Cancellation of a copying operation will result in deletion of
a portion of the title or chapter already copied.
• Cancellation of a copying to a DVD-R cannot restore the
disc space in the DVD-R.
2) Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”, then
press ENTER.
107
Others
•
•
•
•
•
•
Function setup
You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job finishes.
(1) During the operation, press the QUICK MENU button.
(2) Press the / buttons to select “Auto power off”.
(3) Press the ENTER button.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Dubbing selected items (Dubbing specified parts together)
This section explains how to copy several specific titles or chapters. Assigned names of titles/chapters
or other information can also be copied. A title or chapter becomes a title by being copied.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to copy.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
2
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Press
/
to select “Dub Selected Items”.
ENTER
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
R
TU
T
PAUSE
STOP
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
E
3
Press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Dub Selected Items” appears.
e.g.
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
ENTER
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
EDIT Dub Selected Items
HDD
MENU
Title
Original
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Dubbing Media: DVD
Capacity
Start
B
HDD/DVD
A
Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the
upper area.
To change the dubbing destination:
1) Press the QUICK MENU button.
2) Press the / buttons to select “Change media to
HDD” or “Change Media to DVD”.
3) Press the ENTER button.
108
RD-XS32SU_Ope_E_p103-117
108
04.3.18, 4:37 PM
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
Press / / / to select a part (a title or
chapter) to copy.
• To go to the next or previous page, press the
/
) button.
PICTURE SEARCH (
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
ENTER
DVD
• To select a chapter, first select the title that contains
the chapter you want, then press the
button.
To go back to the title display, press the
button
again.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
EDIT Dub Selected Items
HDD
MENU
Title
Playback
e.g.
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
Original
ENTER
CH
Dubbing Media: DVD
E
US
E
UR
T
PAUSE
STOP
T
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
5
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
Press ENTER.
B
A
A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).
e.g.
EDIT Dub Selected Items
MENU
HDD
Title
Original
ENTER
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
Dubbing Media: DVD
Cursor
PROGRESSIVE
Capacity
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Start
B
6
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
Library
REMAIN
A
Press / to select a location to place the
selected part, then press ENTER.
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press the ENTER button.
ENTER
The selected part is inserted into the location of the
cursor.
e.g.
EDIT Dub Selected Items
HDD
MENU
Title
Others
PICTURE SEARCH
Original
Dubbing Media: DVD
Capacity
Start
B
A
(Continued)
109
RD-XS32SU_Ope_E_p103-117
109
04.3.18, 4:37 PM
Editing
Dubbing selected items (Dubbing specified parts together) (Continued)
7
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
You can confirm the available space of the destination media via
the bar at the bottom of the display.
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
Repeat steps 4 to 6.
DVD
Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media
as a title.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
• To cancel selection of an individual part, see
CONTENT MENU
8
Press / to select “Start”, press ENTER, and
select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
page 111.
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
ENTER
The broadcast picture appears and dubbing starts.
The progress for each title is displayed on the screen
and in the front panel display on the recorder. The
buzzer sounds when the operation is completed.
You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job is completed.
1) During the job, press the QUICK MENU button.
2) Press the / buttons to select “Auto power off”.
3) Press the ENTER button.
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
P in P
QUICK MENU
TV
PROGRESSIVE
Notes
• This procedure of “Dub Selected Items” of specified parts does not move them. If you do not want to leave the items on the
original disc, delete them in the procedure for “Deleting selected items” (
page 118).
• To confirm the contents of an item, first select the item by using the / / / buttons and press the QUICK MENU button
to display the Quick Menu. Press the / buttons to select “Preview” (or ”Title information”) then press the ENTER button.
• Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom of the menu for about 2 seconds.
• “High speed dubbing” is not available between the HDD and DVD-R/RW recorded on other equipment.
• Dubbing procedures to DVD-R/RW always comply with “Aspect ratio(Video mode)” setting (
page 162).
• Some parts in DVD-R/RW may be divided if dubbed.
• If you record a title directly onto a DVD-R/RW in the DVD-Video mode on this recorder and execute “High speed dubbing” on
the title to the HDD, the recorder may display a message to initialize the HDD. In this case, delete the title or execute “All
HDD titles delete” (
page 164).
110
Introduction
Cancelling selection of an item
e.g.
EDIT Dub Selected Items
MENU
HDD
Quick Menu
Cancel selected title
Preview
Preview all selected items
Title information
Clear all selected items
Auto power off
Exit
Title
Recording
1) Press / / / to select an item then press
QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Original
Capacity
Playback
Dubbing Media: DVD
Start
B
A
2) Press / to select “Cancel selected title” (or
“All clear” for cancelling selection of multiple
items at a time).
Editing
3) Press ENTER.
Changing the position of an item
Library
Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the
page 109 to
item, then repeat steps 4 to 6 on
insert the item into its desired location.
Cancelling during dubbing
Function setup
Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu.
Press / to select “Cancel dubbing”, then press
ENTER.
Note
• This procedure copies items according to their order
indicated in the lower area. Therefore, there may be a case
that some items have already been copied at the time you
cancel dubbing.
Others
111
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Rate conversion dubbing (Dubbing at a modified bit rate)
You can reduce the recorded picture or sound rate when copying. This procedure enables content originally
recorded onto the HDD at high rate setting to be dubbed onto a DVD-RAM disc at a reduced bit rate.
Use the Rate conversion dubbing when
• you recorded a lengthy content on the HDD using the manual high rate, and it is too large to dub in the DVD-RAM disc.
page 162) to “Off”, and you want to make a
• you recorded a title with setting the “DVD compatible mode” (
DVD-R/RW disc for that title, or you used another recorder to record a title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to
create a DVD-R/RW disc for that title (Set “DVD compatible mode” to “Main” or “SAP” then execute this procedure).
The Rate conversion dubbing can be performed in two different ways: part by part or multiple parts in one time. (To
dub multiple parts in one time, the same rate is applied to all parts. You cannot set different rate to each part.)
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc containing the parts that you want to dub.
Rate Conversion Dubbing for Part by Part
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
DVD
1
2
Perform steps 1 and 2 on
Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
QUICK MENU
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
E
DJ
3
Press / to select “Rate conversion
dubbing”, then press ENTER.
The “CONTENT MENU Rate Conversion Dub” appears.
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
/A
US
page 106.
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
ENTER
e.g.
CONTENT Rate conversion dubbing
MENU
2004/06/11 08:00pm TV:12
(0:52:40)
Original
QUICK MENU
REC
Copy
(Saves Original)
Same Disc
(Saves Original)
Original
Copy
Result
D/M2 LP 2.0
D/M2
LP 2.0
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
112
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Select Quick Menu to modify bitrate.
Higher bitrate for copied media will not improve quality.
All chapter marks will be deleted.
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
/
to select “Copy” or “Same Disc”.
Copy:
After the operation is completed, a specified part will
remain on the disc where it was previously located.
Same Disc:
A part will be copied to the same disc and the copied
part will become another title.
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
IP
SL
SK
W
O
5
Confirm picture and sound rates.
QUICK MENU
ENTER
CH
MENU
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
ENTER
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
Rate conversion dubbing
Quick Menu
2004/06/11
08:00pm
TV:12
AV record
quality
Auto rate selection
Auto power off
Exit
(0:52:40)
Original
Editing
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
To make changes, follow the procedure below.
1) Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick
Menu.
e.g. CONTENT
Copy
(Saves Original)
Same Disc
(Saves Original)
QUICK MENU
REC
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
6
Press ENTER.
QUICK MENU
113
Others
ENTER
Copying starts.
To confirm the job progress, press the TIME BAR button
to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)
When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the
current broadcast picture appears.
Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for
monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may
vary.
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
2) Press the / buttons to select an item then press
the ENTER button.
AV record quality:
page 161) are
The current settings you have made (
/
) button to select a
listed. Press the ADJUST (
desired setting.
Auto rate selection:
The recorder automatically selects the highest possible
rate, calculating from current unoccupied volume on the
disc. (This operation does not insure full recording of any
length program or whole use of unoccupied volume.)
Library
REMAIN
Playback
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
Editing
Rate conversion dubbing (Dubbing at a modified bit rate) (Continued)
Rate Conversion Dubbing for multiple parts
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press / to select “Rate Conv. Items”, then
press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Rate Conv. Items” appears.
ENTER
e.g.
CH
EDIT Rate Conv. Items
HDD
MENU
Title
Original
E
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
Dubbing Media: DVD
QUICK MENU
REC
CHANNEL
ZOOM
3
Collect parts to be dubbed, using steps 4 to 6
page 109.
on
B
A
Each of the collected parts is recorded on the destination media
as a title.
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
You can cancel selection of an individual part.
1) Press the / / / buttons to select an item then press the
QUICK MENU button.
The Quick Menu appears.
2) Press the / buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or “All
clear” for cancelling selection of multiple items at a time).
3) Press the ENTER button.
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
QUICK MENU
114
ENTER
4
Check the rate for picture and sound quality.
To change the setting, perform the following steps.
1) Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick Menu.
2) Press the / buttons to select “AV record quality” and press
the ENTER button.
3) Press the ADJUST ( / ) button to select the setting
number and press the ENTER button.
When “Copy” on the bottom shows “X”, the selected parts are
beyond the disc capacity. Change the rate for picture and sound
quality or reduce parts to dub.
Introduction
5
Press / to select “Start”, and select “Yes”,
then press ENTER.
1) Press QUICK MENU.
2) Press
/
to select “Cancel dubbing”.
Note
• A portion of content from the start of recording to the
moment you cancel dubbing will be copied.
1) During dubbing, press QUICK MENU.
2) Press
/
to select “Auto power off”.
3) Press ENTER.
Library
Turning off the power automatically after
dubbing
Editing
3) Press ENTER.
• When you record an SAP program and play it back, the
main and sub sound are output at the same time. Select
the sound by pressing the AUDIO button.
• When you set “DVD compatible Mode” to “Main” or “SAP”
(
page 162), only a selected sound (the main or sub
sound) of the SAP program is recorded. (Stereo
broadcasting is recorded as stereo).
• If you perform the Rate conversion dubbing for a Playlist,
containing a chapter that is the beginning of the Original
title at recording, one frame at the beginning will be
removed.
• During Rate conversion dubbing, P in P function (
page 69), zoom function (
page 72), “Custom picture
select” (
page 157) and “Play DNR” (
page 158)
are disabled.
• Rate conversion dubbing to DVD-R/RW selects aspect
ratio according to the first title of dubbed items.
• Each part, when selected, shows its name at the bottom
of the menu for about 2 seconds.
Playback
Cancelling dubbing during rate conversion
dubbing
Recording
Copying starts.
To confirm the job progress, press the TIME BAR button
to display the time bar. (The time bar cannot be copied.)
When copying is completed, the buzzer sounds and the
current broadcast picture appears.
Pictures and sounds displayed during copying are for
monitoring purposes only. Recorded picture quality may
vary.
Function setup
Notes
Others
• Unlike High speed dubbing, Rate conversion dubbing may
cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of
recorded content. The time required for dubbing is about
the same as the playback time of the content.
• Quality will not be improved even if you select a rate higher
than original content.
• Chapter marks are not copied.
• Rate conversion dubbing to the same DVD-RAM/R/RW
disc is not possible.
• The recorder automatically inserts a black picture for a
moment before and after the new title produced by this
recording process.
• You cannot use the Rate Conversion Dubbing for copying
from a DVD-RAM disc to another DVD-RAM disc.
• During Rate conversion dubbing, the relay recording
function (
page 163) is disabled even if “Relay
Recording” is set to “On”.
• During Rate conversion dubbing, switching the audio
channel is not possible.
• Audio processed under the Rate conversion dubbing is
recorded in stereo.
115
Dubbing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Line-U dubbing (Recording pictures while viewing them)
You can record the picture being played back in either disc, or to the other disc, if the content is not
page
copy-protected. This procedure can be used also to copy contents of a DVD-R/RW you created (
122), back to the HDD.
Preparation
• Make sure that the destination disc has adequate available remaining space.
• When you want to copy to the HDD, load a disc you want to play.
Example: To copy from a DVD-RAM disc to the HDD
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
CHANNEL
Press INPUT SELECT or CHANNEL repeatedly
to select “LineU.”
A black screen appears.
INPUT SELECT
Line U
Stereo
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
CHANNEL
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
2
IP
SL
LIBRARY
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
HDD
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
Press HDD.
US
T
PI C
T
PAUSE
STOP
UR
E
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
3
Press REC.
Recording starts.
REC
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
4
Press DVD.
DVD
5
Start playing.
PLAY
116
Introduction
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
When playback of content you want to copy is
finished, press STOP.
STOP
Recording
6
OPEN/CLOSE
Playing stops, and a black screen returns.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
CONTENT MENU
7
ENTER
Press HDD.
Playback
LIBRARY
DJ
SE
E
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
QUICK MENU
REC
8
Editing
AM
AR
FR
CH
HDD
Press STOP.
Recording stops.
STOP
Library
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
P in P
Others
117
Function setup
Notes
• The following combinations of a source and a destination disc are possible.
HDD to HDD, HDD to DVD-RAM, HDD to DVD-R/RW, DVD-RAM to HDD, DVD-R/RW to HDD
• A title dubbed by this procedure has black pictures at both the beginning and the end of the title. Therefore thumbnails in the
CONTENT MENU may be black. If you change the thumbnail, see
page 100.
• You can record still pictures and slow pictures during playback.
• Contents of DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, and audio CD cannot be recorded with “Line-U dubbing”.
• “Line-U dubbing” may cause slight deterioration in picture and sound quality of contents.
• Screen menus such as CONTENT MENU or REC MENU cannot be recorded with “Line-U dubbing”.
• “Line-U dubbing” cannot be set as programme recording.
• When doing this procedure, programme recording must not be initiated. If you display the REC MENU, playback is
automatically canceled.
• When setting the input to Line-U, audio output is set to stereo automatically. You cannot switch the audio channel. During
“Line-U dubbing”, you can change the audio output.
• Accompanying audio content to be recorded with “Line-U dubbing” is always in stereo.
• During “Line-U dubbing”, the virtual surround function (
page 158) is disabled.
• Even if “Relay recording” is set to “On” (
page 163), the relay recording function is disabled during “Line-U dubbing”.
• For “Line-U dubbing”, a scene permitting copy-once cannot be copied.
• During Line-U dubbing, P in P function (
page 69), zoom function (
page 72), “Custom picture select” (
page 157)
and “Play DNR” (
page 158) are disabled.
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Deleting selected items (Deleting multiple specified parts)
This section explains how to simultaneously delete unnecessary titles and chapters.
On a finalized DVD-R/RW disc, this feature is not possible.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to delete.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
2
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Press
/
e.g.
ENTER
to select “Del Selected Items”.
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
Source
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
Del Selected Items
CH
ENTER
E
DJ
SE
AM
Several titles or unnecessary chapters
in several titles can bedeleted at one
time.
AR
FR
/A
US
T
PI C
T
PAUSE
STOP
Title
PLAY
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
Title
1
2
2
3
ZOOM
P in P
3
CHANNEL
2
3
Edit Functions
Playlist Editing
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
Press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Del Selected Items” appears.
PROGRESSIVE
e.g.
TV/VIDEO
Title
1
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
E
UR
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
ENTER
EDIT Del Selected Items
HDD
MENU
Title
Original
Object
HDD/DVD
Start
B
A
Thumbnails of the parts in the disc are displayed in the
upper area.
118
IP
SL
SK
W
O
CH
E
DJ
Press repeatedly to select “Start”, then
press ENTER.
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
Following steps 4 to 6 on
page 109,
assemble the items to delete.
Recording
ENTER
4
5
Introduction
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
Playback
ENTER
The recorder begins the deletion process.
To cancel deleting, press the / buttons to select
“No”, then press the ENTER button.
QUICK MENU
REC
When the process is finished, the “EDIT MENU Main
Menu” returns.
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
ZOOM
Editing
DIMMER FL SELECT
P in P
QUICK MENU
TV
PROGRESSIVE
Library
Notes
• To confirm the first and last scenes of an item, first select an item then press the QUICK MENU button. Press the /
buttons to select “Preview” (or “Title information”) then press the ENTER button. This is available only on contents recorded
in the HDD or DVD-RAM discs.
• Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected.
• On a DVD-RW disc, deleting can restore the disc space only by deleting the last recorded title.
• Deleting cannot be canceled once started. Be careful when executing the deletion process.
• If you select a title for the part to be removed, you cannot select chapters in that title.
• Chapters in DVD-R/RW discs cannot be selected to delete.
Function setup
Others
119
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM
Combine Original titles (Combine two titles into one)
Use this feature to combine two titles into one. The second title is deleted as the second title is added to
the end of the first title.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a disc that contains titles or chapters you want to merge.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
EDIT MENU
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press / to select “Combine ORG Title”,
then press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU Combine ORG Title” display appears.
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT Combine ORG Title
MENU
HDD
Title
Original
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
Object :HDD
QUICK MENU
REC
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can e selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
Start combining
Title:
B
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
3
Press
/
A
to select the first title to merge.
Press the PICTURE SEARCH button to move to the
previous or next page.
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
ENTER
PICTURE SEARCH
HDD/DVD
4
Press ENTER.
The cursor appears in the lower area of the screen (the
title to merge to).
ENTER
Object :HDD
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can e selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
Cursor
Start combining
Title:
B
120
A
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press / to select the location to put the
part and press ENTER.
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
5
OPEN/CLOSE
It is fixed at the left side at the beginning. Press the
ENTER button. The selected part moved into the
location of the cursor.
DVD
e.g.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
EDIT Combine ORG Title
MENU
HDD
Title
Original
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Playback
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Object :HDD
For source, only 2 titles (original)
can e selected. After combined,
the second title is included into the
first one.
ENTER
Start combining
Title:
A
E
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
QUICK MENU
REC
TV
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
7
Press / to select “Start combining”and
press ENTER, then select “Yes” and press
ENTER.
Function setup
CHANNEL
ZOOM
You cannot select the same title.
To cancel the registered part:
1) Select the part that you want to cancel, and press the QUICK
MENU button to display the Quick Menu.
2) Press the / buttons to select “Cancel selected title” (or
“Clear all selected items” for cancelling the selection of
multiple items at a time).
3) Press the ENTER button.
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV/VIDEO
6
Perform steps 3 to 5 and select the second
title.
Library
REMAIN
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
B
The combining process starts.
QUICK MENU
ENTER
Others
Notes
• You cannot stop the combining process after it has started.
• You cannot combine titles if their length will exceed 9 hours.
• You cannot combine a protected title or a title containing still pictures.
• The title name of the first title is given to the title after combining.
• The second title is combined into the first title, maintaining the chapter divisions and chapter names.
• Titles and chapters show their names for about 2 seconds at the bottom of the screen when they are selected.
121
Editing
DVD-RW DVD-R
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW
Content stored on the HDD of the recorder can be edited and copied to a DVD-R, a popular media for
distribution, and played on a compatible DVD video player. Rewriteable DVD-RW are also available.
Caution
• Beforehand confirm the content in the disc.
If you use a DVD-R, prepare a new one. This DVD-Video creation procedure is possible only once per disc on
this recorder. Once you have copied to a DVD-R, you cannot redo it, add, delete, or correct the copied contents
in the disc. If you start copying then cancel the job, you cannot re-use the DVD-R.
If you use a DVD-RW, be sure to confirm contents in it. This procedure overwrites a whole disc, and all contents
in a DVD-RW will be lost. If you want to add contents to a DVD-RW, do not use this procedure. Record directly
page 132). This procedure includes the
or make a dubbing to the DVD-RW, then execute the finalization (
finalizing process, and you will not be able to add, delete, or correct contents to a DVD-RW later, as it will have
been finalized. If a finalized DVD-RW has remaining space, you can add contents there if you cancel the
page 135).
finalizing process of the DVD-RW (
• Do not start copying to a DVD-R/RW when a programmed recording is scheduled to begin shortly.
Copying entirely to a DVD-R/RW will take 1 hour and a half (variable depending on the contents). (This does not
include time for “Writing Test”. This option requires more time. Actual time for “Writing Test” depends on the
contents to test, and may be longer than the playing time of the contents if the disc contains too little contents or
too many quality and picture settings, etc.)
If a start time of a programmed recording comes during this procedure, the recording is made onto the HDD.
However, while making a menu theme, the recording is not executed. Also, programmed recordings to DVD
page 163) are not executed.
media with “Off” setting of “Relay recording” (
If a programmed recording starts during this procedure, you cannot continue to make one more discs after
completion of the first disc.
• Ensure the compatibility of a disc.
page 9.
Refer to the
* Discs made by this procedure will comply with the DVD-Video standard. However, it is not guaranteed to play
properly on all DVD video players (including TOSHIBA products).
Depending on the disc, there may be a difference of data capacity between DVD-R and DVD-RW. It may be
possible that contents you have just recorded onto a DVD-R cannot be recorded onto a DVD-RW. (DVD-RW
capacity may be smaller.)
• Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.
Preparation
• Record contents which you want to copy to DVD-R/RW to make DVD-Video, to the HDD with the following settings:
page 162): “Main” or “SAP”.
- “DVD compatible mode” (
- Bit rate of 4.0 or more.
• Load a new DVD-R or a DVD-RW. (Follow the instructions on handling of the disc.)
• Press the HDD button to select the HDD mode.
Notes
• If you recorded a title while setting “DVD compatible mode” (
page 162) to “Off” or you used another recorder to record a
title in a DVD-RAM disc, and you want to copy such a title to a DVD-R/RW to create a DVD-Video, first set “DVD
compatible mode” to “Main” or “SAP” then execute the procedure of “Rate conversion dubbing (
page 112).
• Depending on the disc, DVD-R 4x speed compatibility may be disabled.
122
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press EDIT MENU.
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
e.g.
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
Chapter Editing
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
Edit Functions
Title
Merge
SL
4
5
IP
U
IC T
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
2
Press / to select “DVD-Video Creation”,
then press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU DVD-Video Create (Selected Items)”
appears.
P
PLAY
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT DVD-Video Create
HDD
MENU (Selected Items)
Sourece: Title
Editing
E
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
3
SK
W
O
DJ
2
Playback
Divide
CONTENT MENU
1
/A
Playlist Editing
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
1
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
Source
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
Chapters can be divided on frame
basis. Chapters can be merged and
assigned names.
EASY
NAVI
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
1
OPEN/CLOSE
Original
QUICK MENU
REC
Library
Creating Media: DVD
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
Next
Capacity
P in P
A
B
TV
CHANNEL
Thumbnails of titles on the HDD are displayed in the
upper area.
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
3
PICTURE SEARCH
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
PROGRESSIVE
Press / / / to select a part (a title or
chapter) to copy to the DVD-R/RW.
• To go to the preceding or following page, press the
PICTURE SEARCH button.
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT DVD-Video Create
HDD
MENU (Selected Items)
Sourece: Title
Original
Creating Media: DVD
Next
Capacity
B
A
123
Others
• To select a chapter, first select the title that contains
button.
the chapter you want, then press the
button again.
To return to the title display, press the
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
4
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press ENTER.
A cursor appears in the lower area (destination media).
e.g.
CHANNEL
HDD
TIMESLIP
EDIT DVD-Video Create
HDD
MENU (Selected Items)
ENTER
Sourece: Title
Original
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
Creating Media: DVD
Cursor
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Next
Capacity
B
A
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
5
Press / to select a location to place the
selected part, then press ENTER.
If there are no parts in the lower area, leave the cursor
to the left and press the ENTER button.
ENTER
QUICK MENU
REC
The selected part is inserted into the location of the
cursor.
e.g.
EDIT DVD-Video Create
HDD
MENU (Selected Items)
REMAIN
Sourece: Title
Original
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
ZOOM
P in P
Creating Media: DVD
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
Next
Capacity
B
6
QUICK MENU
PICTURE SEARCH
A
Repeat steps 3 to 5.
You can confirm the available volume of a DVD-R/RW on the bar
at the bottom of the menu.
Each of the assembled parts is recorded onto the destination
media as a title.
• To cancel selection of a part, see
page 130.
• To change the title/chapter name or thumbnail before selection:
1) Select the part that you want to change, and press the QUICK
MENU button.
2) Press the / buttons to select “Edit title name” or “Modify
title thumbnail” to change the title, or “Edit chapter name” or
“Modify chapter thumbnail” to change the chapter, and press
the ENTER button.
3) Use the entry screen to change the title or chapter name.
To change a title thumbnail or a chapter thumbnail, see the
page 100.
steps on
124
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
to select “Start”, then press
A screen is displayed to select options.
e.g.
CHANNEL
EDIT DVD Video Creation(Option Settings)
Recording
ANGLE SUBTITLE
Press /
ENTER.
Introduction
7
OPEN/CLOSE
MENU
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
Menu Create
DVD
Start Play
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
CONTENT MENU
Menu
Next Title
After play on title
Menu
Title 1
Writing Test
None
Set Aspect Ratio
Original
Chapter
Stop
Parts Test
4:3 fixed
All Test
16:9 fixed
E
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
8
Press
/
/
/
Playback
Return
DJ
None
SK
W
O
Next
A
B
/A
Title
Title 1
IP
SL
Menu
After play on title
REC MENU EDIT MENU
LIBRARY
Title+Chapter
to set the items.
ENTER
QUICK MENU
REC
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
If you select “None” for “Menu Create”:
The setting of “Start Play” and “Start after playing one
title” is skipped automatically.
P in P
Library
REMAIN
• When you have selected “Parts Test” or “All Test” for
“Writing Test”, extra time is required for pre-writing
test. “All Test” requires more time than “Parts Test”.
If a DVD-RW is used, the recorder regards “All Test”
selection as “Parts Test” to execute the test.
Editing
For the instruction of setting, see the description shown
at selection.
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
to select “Next”, then press
A screen is displayed to confirm the information you are
going to write.
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT DVD Video Creation(Disc Information)
MENU
Disc name
Function setup
9
Press /
ENTER.
Edit Name
Total title number
11
1 hour 24 min.
Total time
Others
Return
B
Next
A
Press the button to select “Edit Name” and press the
ENTER button to go to the character entry screen. The
number of characters is limited for the disc name you can
enter.
If you selected “None” for “Menu Create” at step 8,
select “Writing” on the bottom right corner, and press the
ENTER button. Skip to step 14.
125
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
10
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press
to select “Next”, then press ENTER.
A display of title menu selection appears if “Menu
Create” is set to “Tltle+Chapter” or “Title” at step 7.
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
To view your captured images (
next page.
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
e.g.
EDIT DVD Video Creation(Title Menu Select)
REC MENU EDIT MENU
1/ 2
MENU
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
SK
W
O
Deep Blue
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
Cyber Green
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
Light Blue
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Lavender
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
Cyber Red
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
Orange
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
Sepia
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
LEAVE HERE
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
Olive
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
ENTER
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
IP
SL
page 129), go to the
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
While displaying a preview screen of your captured
image, you can access the other menu to correct color
page 129) by pressing the
button.
(
11
Press / / /
press ENTER.
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
A
If you press the
button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press the O button.
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
B
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
ENTER
12
Press
to select the menu, then
If you have set “Menu Create” to “Title+Chapter” or
“Chapter” at step 7, a screen is displayed to select a
chapter menu.
/
/
/
to select the chapter menu.
The selected menu is set for all chapters.
You cannot set it for each chapter individually.
ENTER
If you press the
button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press the O button.
If you press the button to select “Return” while
previewing and press the ENTER button, you will return
to the preview of the title menu. To go back to the
chapter menu, press the / / / button to select a
number next to “Chapter Menu” on the bottom center.
126
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
Press ENTER on the “EDIT MENU DVD-Video
Creation (Chapter Menu Select)” display.
A confirmation message is displayed.
CHANNEL
Recording
ANGLE SUBTITLE
Introduction
13
OPEN/CLOSE
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
14
Press
ENTER
to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
The current broadcast picture appears and dubbing
starts. The progress is displayed on the screen and in
the front panel display on the recorder.
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
/
Playback
IP
SL
LIBRARY
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
When the process is completed, a message “Create
another DVD-Video now?” appears (except when “Auto
power off” (see below) is set). If you select “Yes”, you
can make one more DVD-R/RW of the same content. If
you select “No”, you can complete creating the DVDVideo.
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
QUICK MENU
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
• You can set the recorder to turn off automatically when
the job finishes.
1) During the job, press the QUICK MENU button.
2) Press the / buttons to select “Auto power off”.
3) Press the ENTER button.
Library
REMAIN
When copying is completed, a finalizing process follows.
This enables the disc to be played on a DVD video
player.
Editing
REC
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
Function setup
QUICK MENU
Others
127
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
Notes
• The number of titles that you can write on a DVD-R/RW is
limited (99 titles. Each title should have 99 chapters or
less). If you have a large number of titles or chapters, you
may not be able to write due to the limitation of the DVD
specifications. Also, even if the number of titles and
chapters is within the limit, you may not be able to write if
you have a large number of menu items.
• Due to standard differences, the number of chapters and
their position may change slightly after DVD-Video
creation. (For chapters generated on the DVD-R/RW, the
same thumbnail for the Original chapter is displayed.)
• Due to standard limitation, DVD-R/RW may contain
unnecessary scenes after creation.
• If you select items of various types of video outputs, aspect
ratios or other properties, or if you select an item recorded
with different settings, they may be divided into titles. (For
titles generated on the DVD-R/RW, the same thumbnail for
the Original title is displayed).
• Content based on a complicated PlayList or composed of
too many items may not be copied properly.
• Copy-once permitted contents cannot be copied to a
DVD-R/RW, even if they are recorded onto the HDD while
“DVD compatible mode” is set to “Main” or “SAP” (
page
162).
• Content recorded on a recorder other than this recorder
(including TOSHIBA products) cannot be copied to a DVDR/RW using High Speed Dubbing. First set “DVD
compatible mode” to “Main” or “SAP” and record them onto
the HDD. Then perform “Rate conversion dubbing”
page 112) to copy to the HDD.
(
• When a content is recorded with manual rate 1.4 Mbps and
is including a 16:9 picture shape scene, the DVD creation
of the content may failure. In this case, set “Set Aspect
Ratio” to “4:3 fixed” on the menu “(Option Settings)”.
• Even if the title is recorded with “DVD compatible mode” set
to “Main” or “SAP”, using a recorder other than this may
cause failure when recording to a DVD-R/RW.
• If the DVD-R creating fails to be completed, most of the
discs cannot be used again.
• If an error occurs while a DVD-Video is created, the error
code “ERR- ” ( indicates the error code) is shown in
** **
page 169) To
the front panel display of the recorder. (
clear this display, press the DISPLAY button.
• There may be a difference between a specified thumbnail
of menu in the DVD-Video creation procedure and the one
on displayed in the CONTENT MENU.
128
Selecting the items displayed on the menu
You can hide items on the menu if necessary.
To hide a disc name
Leave “Disc Name” blank. Display the on-screen
keyboard and press the CLEAR button to delete
button to save.
letters, then press the
To hide a page number
Leave “Disc Name” blank. Follow the above
method.
To hide a disc name and show a page number
Enter one more space in “Disc Name”.
To hide a title/chapter name
On the CONTENT MENU or a display of item
selection, select a title/chapter and display the
on-screen keyboard from the Quick Menu. Erase all
characters of the name.
You can hide a time also using the same manner.
• “Chapter 0001” . . . on the CONTENT MENU
means that the chapter is given no characters as
its name. Such a chapter does not show the
name on the menu.
• A chapter menu shows the title name at the top
right corner. If you hide the title name, no
character appears in this area.
To hide a title/chapter name and show a time
Enter one more space and save it as the title/
chapter name.
Note
• You cannot hide items other than above.
You can select favorite scenes from the recorded
contents and use them as menus of DVD-Video
page 126) DVD-R/RW.
Created (
1) During stop or playback, press CONTENT
MENU.
To delete all captured images, select “Delete all
menus”.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press
/
to select “Save captured images”.
Selecting color options on menus
Several options are available: a translucent
background for better legibility, character color and
cursor color selections.
6) Press /
ENTER.
page 126), go to the next page
1) At step 10 (
and select a captured image by / / / ,
.
then press
The preview screen appears.
e.g.
EDIT
MENU
Save captures images
HDD
Playback
5) Select a scene.
Locate a scene using the buttons such as PLAY,
SLOW, FRAME or PAUSE, etc.
to select “Loading” and press
Recording
2) Press / / / to select a title which
contains a scene to use as menus.
To delete a captured image
Press / / / to select an image to delete then
press QUICK MENU. Press / to select “Delete
menu” then press ENTER. Follow the message to
operate.
Introduction
Using a favorite scene as a menu
2003/06/10 05:09pm CH:3
.
2) Press
A color setting display appears.
e.g.
00:00:00
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
00:54:30
Editing
Original Aspect Ratio 4:3
Loading
Location 00:00:00:03F
Select back ground picture
EDIT DVD-Video Creation (color setting)
MENU
Back ground color
Color
On
Off
White
Black
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Permeation Ratio
T001(00:00:23)
0.9
DO NOT
Character
color 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DO NOT
Selecting
color
Selected
color
Save captures images
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
A
3) Set each item by / / / , referring to the
guidance on the right half of the display, finally
press to exit.
The preview screen returns.
HDD
Quick Menu
2003/06/10 05:09pm CH:3
Enter DVD-Video menu name
Delete name
Original Aspect Ratio 4:3
Delete all menus
Loading
Location 00:00:00:03F
Exit
Function setup
MENU
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
Set up the disc name, the
title name or page numer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 on upper side of the screen,
OR the letter color of the
title name, the chapter
and the time beside
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 name
the thumbnail.
B
To name a captured image
Press / / / to select an image to name then
press QUICK MENU. Press / to select “Enter
DVD-Video menu name” then press ENTER.
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
Library
Note
• You cannot capture copy-protected contents.
• The maximum number of pictures which can be saved
varies depending on the data size.
EDIT
0.7
LEAVE HERE
B
e.g.
0.5
Select back ground picture
Title: 002 Chapter: 0004
Others
00:00:00
00:54:30
T001(00:00:23)
B
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Enter a name.
129
Editing
Creating a DVD-Video using DVD-R/RW (Confined)
To improve legibility of characters on menus
Press / / / to set “Back ground color” to
“On”. Then select “Color” (“White” or “Black”)
according to the menu’s tone, and set “Permeation
Ratio”, which sets the how translucent the selected
Back ground color is. The higher the ratio, the Back
ground color will be more translucent but the lower
legibility of characters.
To change the character color
Press / / / to select from 12 colors. When
you select “White” back ground color, dark color
should be a better choice.
Canceling selection of an item
1) Press / / / to selectan item then press
QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
e.g.
EDIT DVD-Video Create
HDD
MENU (Selected Items)
Quick Menu
Cancel selected title
Preview
Preview all selected items
Title information
Clear all selected items
Auto power off
Exit
Sourece: Title
Creating Media: DVD
Next
Capacity
B
To change the cursor color
“Selecting Color” is a color for moving cursor.
“Selected Color” is one for press of the ENTER
button.
To preview your selections
Press the O button to return to the preview screen.
If you correct your selections, repeat steps 2) and
page 129).
3) (
Original
A
2) Press / to select “Cancel selected title” (or
“Clear all selected items” for canceling
selection of all items at a time).
3) Press ENTER.
The selected item disappears.
Changing the location of an item
Follow the procedure above to cancel selection of the
item, then repeat steps 3 to 5 to re-insert the item in a
page 123, 124).
desired location (
Confirming the content in the lower area
Select an item and press QUICK MENU. Then press
/ to select “Preview” and press ENTER.
Notes
• Each time an item is selected, its name appears at the
bottom of the screen.
• You can also confirm the content by selecting “Title
information” from the Quick Menu.
Canceling dubbing process
Press QUICK MENU to display the Quick Menu.
Press / to select “Stop creating DVD video”,
then press ENTER.
Notes
• To cancel creating a DVD-R will render the loaded DVD-R
useless.
• Canceling is not always possible.
130
Introduction
If a message appears while selecting a part
Recording
You may receive a message, such as “Selection of
Writing Test in the next option setting is recommended
to check whether Aspect Ratio coexists”. If a copyprohibited content is included, or if the aspect ratio is
changed meanwhile, cancel the selection. If you are
not sure, select Writing Test (“Parts Test” or “All Test”).
Playback
Note
• Depending on selection or condition of items, copying may
result in failure. If a message appears, be sure to, prior to
step 7, press the QUICK MENU button. Then press the
/ buttons to select “Cancel selected title”, and press
the ENTER button. If you do not do this and continue the
copying process, an error may occur and the disc will be
rendered useless.
Editing
Playing a created DVD-Video
You can play the DVD-R/RW in the same manner as you
would play a DVD video disc.
page 60.
See
Library
If you want to correct the contents of a DVD-RW
after the DVD-Video creation procedure
Function setup
Cancel the finalization of the DVD-RW (
page 135).
It is possible only on DVD-RW recorded on this
recorder.
After canceling, you can delete titles. However, you
cannot re-use the whole disc, since only the last title
can restore the disc space.
If you want to delete all contents of a DVD-RW
after the DVD-Video creation procedure
Load the DVD-RW into the recorder and initialize it,
then execute the procedure of DVD-Video creation
page 122).
(
Others
131
Editing
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-Video finalizing process
The recorder processes recorded data in a DVD-R/RW disc so that it can be played on other compatible
devices.
Important
• You cannot rewrite data onto a disc after you execute the DVD-Video finalizing process. However, the disabled rewritability of
a DVD-RW disc can be restored by canceling the process of the disc (
page 135). On DVD-R discs, canceling of the
DVD-Video finalizing process is not available.
• Canceling of the DVD-Video finalizing process is available only on DVD-RW recorded or copied contents on this recorder.
Preparation
• Press the DVD button to select the DVD mode.
• Load a DVD-R/RW disc you want to execute the finalizing process.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
The EDIT MENU Main Menu appears.
CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press
/
to select “DVD-Video Finalizing”.
e.g.
EDITMain Menu
DVD-R
MENU
ENTER
Source
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
DVD-Video Finalizing
ENTER
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
Used to crete compatibility between
the recorded DVD-R/-RW and
DVD Players. Also used for setting up
“menu picture”, etc.
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
Title
Title
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Playlist Editing
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
2
QUICK MENU
REC
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
3
Press ENTER.
A display of option settings appears.
P in P
e.g.
PROGRESSIVE
ENTER
TV/VIDEO
1
Finalize
Menu
REMAIN
Edit Functions
Title
2
CHANNEL
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
EDIT DVD-Video Finalize(Option Settings)
MENU
Menu Create
Start Play
Title+Chapter
Menu
Title
After play on title
Menu
Next Title
After play on title
Menu
Title 1
Writing Test
None
Set Aspect Ratio
Original
Chapter
Parts Test
4:3 fixed
Stop
All Test
16:9 fixed
Return
B
132
A
None
Title 1
Next
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press
/
/
to select.
As you select each item, its function is explained.
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
/
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
When “Menu Create” is set to “None”:
“Start play” and “After play one title” are automatically
omitted.
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
IP
SL
SK
W
O
5
Press /
ENTER.
to select “Next”, then press
Information on data to be processed appears.
e.g.
EDIT DVD-Video Finalize(Disc Information)
MENU
ENTER
ENTER
Disc name
CH
Edit Name
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
11
Editing
E
DJ
Total title number
SE
AM
AR
FR
/A
Playback
CONTENT MENU
LIBRARY
1 hour 24 min.
Total time
QUICK MENU
REC
Return
Next
A
B
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
ZOOM
When “Menu Create” is set to “None”:
Select “Writing” at the right bottom by the / / /
buttons and press the ENTER button. Skip to step 10.
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
6
Press
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
Library
If you press the button to select “Edit Name” then
press the ENTER button, a keyboard appears so that
you can enter a title name.
to select “Next”, then press ENTER.
When “Menu Create” is set to “Title+Chapter” or “Title”,
a display of title menu selection appears.
ENTER
1/ 2
MENU
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Deep Blue
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Olive
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Sepia
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
DO NOT
LEAVE HERE
Light Blue
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
MR. SATO, PLEASE JOIN US TO CREATE MANUALS
DO NOT
DO NOT
If you press the
button, you can preview the selected
menu. To return, press the O button.
While displaying aB previewA screen of your captured
image, you can access the other menu to correct color
page 129) by pressing the
button.
(
(Continued)
133
Others
page 129), go to the
To view your captured images (
next page.
e.g. EDIT DVD-Video Finalize (Title Menu Select)
Editing
DVD-Video finalize process (Continued)
7
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press / / /
press ENTER.
to select the title menu, then
A display of chapter menu selection appears if “Menu
Create” is set to “Tltle+Chapter” or `Chapter” at step 3.
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
8
Press
E
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
DJ
US
E
UR
T
PAUSE
STOP
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
T
PI C
PLAY
CHANNEL
ZOOM
P in P
to select the chapter menu.
button, you can preview the selected
If you press the
menu. To return, press the O button.
9
Press ENTER on the “EDIT MENU DVD-Video
Finalize (Chapter Menu Select)” display, and
select “Yes” by / , then press ENTER.
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
ENTER
QUICK MENU
10
A message appears to ask you if you want the power to
turn off automatically or not when the process is
completed.
Press /
ENTER.
ENTER
134
/
button during preview, to select
If you press the
“Return” then press the ENTER button, you can go to
the preview of the selected title menu. To return to the
preview of chapter menu, press the / / / buttons
to select a number next to “Chapter Menu” then press
the ENTER button.
QUICK MENU
REC
/
A selected menu is applied to all chapters. You cannot
allocate a menu to each chapter.
ENTER
/A
/
to select “Yes” or “No” then press
A message disappears and the finalize process starts.
The progress is displayed on the screen and in the front
panel display on the recorder.
Introduction
Recording
Notes
• DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this recorder may not be
recognized on other devices unless you execute DVDVideo finalizing process to them.
• You can record onto a DVD-R disc additionally to the limit
of the disc capacity, unless you execute the DVD-Video
finalizing process to it. Deleting of recorded titles is also
possible, however, the disc space cannot be restored.
• You can record additional content onto a DVD-RW disc
additionally to the limit of the disc capacity unless you
execute the DVD-Video finalizing process to it. Deleting of
recorded titles is also possible, however, the disc space
can be restored only by the volume of the title last
recorded.
• On DVD-RW discs, it is possible to cancel the DVD-Video
finalizing process or to initialize for a new use.
• If a start time of a programmed recording comes during
finalizing process, the recording is made onto the HDD.
However, while making a menu, the recording is not
executed. Also, when “Relay recording” is set to “Off” the
recording will not start.
Playback
Editing
To cancel the finalize process DVD-RW
You can cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed to a DVD-RW disc so that the disc can be
recordable again.
Library
1) During stop, press QUICK MENU.
A quick menu appears.
2) Press / to select “Disc management” then
press ENTER.
4) Read the message, and press
“Yes”, then press ENTER.
The process starts.
/
Function setup
3) Press / to select “Cancel finalization” then
press ENTER.
to select
Others
Notes
• While the recorder is ready to start a programmed
recording, you cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing
process.
• You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed on a DVD-RW disc recorded on other device.
• You cannot cancel the DVD-Video finalizing process
executed on a DVD-RW disc if the disc is protected.
• Canceling the DVD-Video finalizing process may shift the
thumbnails of titles/chapters.
135
Editing
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DV recording (Recording from a digital video camera)
You can connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV terminal to record from it.
Preparation
• Press the HDD or DVD button to select a recording media
• Connect a DV format digital video camera to the DV terminal on the front panel.
DV terminal
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
During playback or stop, press EDIT MENU.
The “EDIT MENU Main Menu” appears.
CHANNEL
EDIT MENU
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press
/
to select “DV Recording”.
e.g.
EDITMain Menu
HDD
MENU
ENTER
When using DV terminal, it is used for
setting up Auto Chapter Creation and
AV Record Quality.
E
/A
DJ
US
E
UR
T
PAUSE
STOP
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
TV/VIDEO
T
PI C
PLAY
Recording
Saved Title
1
2
Playlist Editing
Dub Selected Items
Rate Conv. Items
Combine ORG Title
DVD-Video Creation
DVD-Video Finalizing
Del Selected Items
3
4
5
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
Edit Functions
DV Original Picture
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
CHANNEL
ZOOM
3
Press ENTER.
The “EDIT MENU DV Recording (Option Setting)”
appears.
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
ENTER
e.g.
EDIT DV Recording (Option Setting)
MENU
DV Chapter Create
Off
By Date
DVD-Video:CHP Create
Off
5min.
DV Audio Input
HDD/DVD
Source
DV Recording
Chapter Editing
DV Recording
Stereo1(L2+R2)
AV Record Quality SP 4.6
B
D/M1
By Scene
10min. 15min.
20min.
Stereo2(L2+R2)
Change
Next
A
This display will also appear when a DV format digital
video camera connected to the DV terminal is turned on.
136
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press
TIMESLIP
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
/
to make the settings.
5
/
/
to select “Next”, then press
Details on the recording appears.
E
/A
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
e.g.
ENTER
EDIT
Editing
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
Press /
ENTER.
Playback
To change the picture and sound rates:
1) Press the / buttons to select “Change” then press
the ENTER button.
2) On the “AV record quality” display, press the ADJUST
button to select a setting number.
3) Press the ENTER button.
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
/
As you select each item, an explanation is provided.
CHANNEL
ENTER
HDD
/
Recording
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
Introduction
4
OPEN/CLOSE
Equipment with DV Terminal
MENU DV Recording
“Play” and then “Pause” with the connected equipment to DV.
Manufacturer ------------------Playback Time
Equipement -------------------
––:––:––:––F
QUICK MENU
REC
Recording Media : DVD
Rec
REMAIN
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
CHANNEL
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
6
7
A
Play the connected DV format digital video
camera and pause the play at a desired scene.
Press /
ENTER.
/
/
Function setup
TV/VIDEO
ZOOM
B
Library
Rec
Stop(Save)
Playback Time ––:––:––
Remaining space ––:––:––
AV Record Quality SP 4.6 D/M1
DV Chapter Create Off
Full Display End Return
to select “Rec”, then press
Recording starts.
ADJUST
ENTER
Others
To pause the recording, select “Pause” by the
/ / / buttons then press the ENTER button.
To stop the recording, select “Stop (Save)” by the
/ / / buttons then press the ENTER button.
137
Editing
DV Recording (Recording from a digital video camera) (Continued)
Notes
• The DV terminal of this recorder supports only input from a
DV format digital video camera. It cannot output to a
connected device. Some models of DV format digital video
cameras may be not compatible.
• At step 5, you can enlarge the video image by selecting
“Full Display”, then pressing the ENTER button.
• If “DV Chapter Create” is set to “Off” and you record onto a
DVD-R/RW disc, chapters are automatically made
according to the “DVD-Video:CHP create” setting
page 162). The number of chapters has the limit.
(
Chapters are divided with a margin of about 0.5 second or
less according to the DVD-Video standard.
• DV recording does not start in the following cases:
- While recording or in the time slip mode.
- While operating a REC MENU, CONTENT MENU or
LIBRARY MENU.
- If the recorder’s clock is not set yet.
- Within 5 minutes before a programmed recording starts, or
during a programmed recording.
• If a DV recording overlaps with a programmed recording,
the DV recording will stop 5 minutes before the
programmed recording starts, and the programmed
recording will be executed.
• DV recording does not work if the DV terminal is connected
equipment other than DV format digital video camera, such
as a PC.
• Depending on the connected DV format digital video
camera, the display at step 5 may not show “Manufacturer”
or “Equipment”.
• If the DV terminal is connected to more than one DV format
digital video camera, DV recording may not work properly.
For proper functioning of DV recording, connect only one
device to the DV terminal.
• DV recording is not compatible with Relay recording.
• Do not keep the DV terminal connected unless you record
from a DV format digital video camera, as it may give
influence on the recorder if operated.
• If you leave the “EDIT MENU DV Recording” unoperated
for about 15 minutes, it switches to the full mode if “Screen
protector” (
page 159) is set to “On.”
• When you want to record both stereo 1 and stereo 2
sounds from a DV format digital video camera, additionally
make a connection to the audio input jacks on this recorder
using cables such as audio/video cables supplied with the
DV format digital video camera. (
page 37)
• If a DV format digital video camera is not recognized, pull
out the plug and connect it again.
• Some models of DV format digital video cameras may
support a different compression format. From such
equipment, recording is not possible.
• Depending on the models of DV format digital video
cameras, recording may not work properly or some
functions may be disabled.
• On an input source from a DV tape which is partly recorded
over, chapters may not made properly.
138
Library
To facilitate your collecting.
Using Library data
Searching for a desired title
Checking the Library data
Checking remaining space
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Using Library data
The recorder has a “Library Management” database which memorizes various properties of recordings
made on this recorder, including date, media, title, genre, etc. Using this database, you can search for
desired or available discs.
You can utilize Library data as follows.
• To search for a DVD-RAM disc that contains a desired title.
• To check or change information of title or disc.
• To check the remaining space of a DVD-RAM disc.
Basic operation of the Library system
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
AUDIO
Press LIBRARY.
CHANNEL
LIBRARY
The “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”
appears.
e.g.
HDD
TIMESLIP
DVD
No.
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
1/ 2
MENU
2
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
Day
6/20
6/19
6/18
6/17
6/13
Su
Sa
Fr
Th
S
Time
7:00
11:00
7:00
9:00
11 00
pm
pm
pm
pm
CH Genre
5
4
3
3
2
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
2004/06/20
2004/06/19
2004/06/18
2004/06/17
2004/06/13
07:00pm
11:00pm
07:00pm
09:00pm
11 00
...
...
...
...
Press QUICK MENU.
A Quick Menu appears.
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
Date
US
T
PAUSE
STOP
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
e.g.
DISPLAY TIME BAR CHP DIVIDE
DIMMER FL SELECT
TV
ZOOM
P in P
PROGRESSIVE
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
MENU
No.
1/ 2
Quick Menu
Date
Day
Time
DVD space remaining
discSu
no. 7:00
2004/all6/20
HDDDVD
information
2004/
6/19 Sa 11:00
HDDTitle
Arrange
HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00
Narrowing
HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00
Jump
2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00
HDDDisc
information
2004/management
6/13 Su 9:00
HDD
Library
6/11 Fr 9:00
HDD 2004/ Exit
pm
pm
pm
pm
pm
pm
pm
HDD 2004/ 6/ 9 We 9:00 pm
HDD 2004/ 6/ 8 T 10:27 pm
QUICK MENU
REC
REMAIN
QUICK MENU
3
Press /
ENTER.
CH Genre
5
4
3
3
2
4
L1
L1
L2
t
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
2004/06/20
2004/06/19
2004/06/18
2004/06/17
2004/06/13
2004/06/13
2004/06/11
2004/06/ 9
2004/06/ 9
07:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
07:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
10:27pm
to select an item, then press
For details on each item, see from the next page.
TV/VIDEO
CHANNEL
VOLUME INPUT SELECT
ENTER
Notes
• To cancel this procedure, press the LIBRARY button.
• The Library system does not support DVD-R/RW discs.
• Selecting a title on the “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, and pressing the ENTER button begins playback of the
title if the disc containing the title is loaded.
• For proper function of the Library system, use DVD-RAM discs that shows a statement on its package such as “This disc can
copy images that permit copying once.” If you use a DVD-RAM disc without such a statement, and then operate it on other
device, the library data of the disc may not function properly. • The LIBRARY MENU may not display all characters of a
registered name of a disc.
140
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Searching for a desired title
Changing the listing order
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
No.
1/ 2
Quick Menu
Date
Day
Time
pm
pm
pm
pm
pm
pm
pm
HDD 2004/ 6/ 9 We 9:00 pm
10:27
pm
2004/
6/
8
Tu
HDD
CH Genre
Sort by disc(DVD)
An input window appears.
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
Arrange by title name
Arrange
by2004/06/20
disc no. 07:00pm ...
5
genre 11:00pm ...
4Arrange by
2004/06/19
week
3Arrange by
2004/06/18
07:00pm ...
Arrange by date
3
2
4
L1
L1
L2
2004/06/17
2004/06/13
2004/06/13
2004/06/11
2004/06/ 9
etc
... 2004/06/ 9
e.g.
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
1/ 2
MENU
No.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
09:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
10:27pm ...
Notes
• If you repeat the selection of different types of the listing
order, the old one precedes the new one. For example,
when you select “Arrange by genre” then “Arrange by disc
no.”, the order of genre is produced in the order of disc
number.
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
6/20
6/19
6/18
6/17
6/13
6/13
6/11
6/ 9
Day
Time
CH Genre
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
2004/06/20
Su 7:00 pm 5
2004/06/19
Sa 11:00 pm 4
2004/06/18
Fr 7:00 pm 3
Sortpmby3disc(DVD)
2004/06/17
Th 9:00
Disc
No.
–
Su 11:00 pm 2 0 0 1 2004/06/13
2004/06/13
Su 9:00 pm 4
2004/06/11
Fr 9:00 pm L1
2004/06/ 9
We 9:00 pm L1
07:00pm
11:00pm
07:00pm
09:00pm
11:00pm
09:00pm
09:00pm
09:00pm
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Follow steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press / to select a location, then press
ADJUST or / to enter the disc number.
Editing
2) Press / to select the listing order, then press
ENTER.
Titles are arranged in selected order.
Date
Playback
DVD space remaining
discSu
no. 7:00
2004/all6/20
HDDDVD
information
2004/
6/19 Sa 11:00
HDDTitle
Arrange
HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00
Narrowing
HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00
Jump
2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00
HDDDisc
information
2004/management
6/13 Su 9:00
HDD
Library
6/11 Fr 9:00
HDD 2004/ Exit
/
2) Press ENTER.
Titles in the specified disc are sorted. For
example, if you enter “001-”, titles in discs 001,
001A and 001B are listed.
Searching
Sort by day
Narrowing
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
No.
1/ 2
Quick Menu
Date
Day
Time
DVD space remaining
CH Genre
Sort by genre
/
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
07:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
07:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
10:27pm ...
Notes
• Press the O button to go back to the display for the
previous narrowing condition.
• If you want to display all titles, press the QUICK MENU
button, then press the / buttons to select “Cancel
narrowings” and press the ENTER button.
Others
discSu
no. 7:00 pm Sort
2004/all6/20
5 by disc(DVD)
2004/06/20
HDDDVD
information
2004/
6/19 Sa 11:00 pmSort
4 by disc(HDD)
2004/06/19
HDDTitle
Arrange
Sort by day
2004/06/18
HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00 pm 3
Narrowing
2004/06/17
HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00 pm 3
Jump
2004/
6/13
2
2004/06/13
Su 11:00 pm
HDDDisc information
2004/
6/13
4
2004/06/13
Su
9:00
pm
HDD
Library management
6/11 Fr 9:00 pm L1
2004/06/11
HDD 2004/ Exit
2004/06/ 9
HDD 2004/ 6/ 9 We 9:00 pm L1
HDD 2004/ 6/ 8 Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc
... 2004/06/ 9
The submenu appears.
Press the / buttons to select the day, then press
the ENTER button.
Titles recorded on the selected day are listed.
Function setup
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Narrowing” by
then press ENTER.
The sub menu appears.
MENU
Library
Sort By Disc(HDD)
Titles in the HDD are sorted.
e.g.
Recording
The submenu appears.
Press the / buttons to select a genre, then press
the ENTER button.
Titles within the selected genre are sorted.
Arrange
MENU
buttons. If
Sort by genre
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Arrange” by
then press ENTER.
The sub menu appears.
e.g.
/
Introduction
From the “LIBRARY MENU Title Summary (All Titles)”, you can select a title by using the
you change the listing order or sort the titles, search may be easier.
2) Press / to select a narrowing condition, then
press ENTER.
141
Library
Searching for a desired title (Continued)
Appoint disc no.
Jumping
The on-screen keyboard appears.
Jump
e.g.
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Jump” by
then press ENTER.
The sub menu appears.
e.g.
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
MENU
1/ 2
Quick Menu
No.
Date
Day
Time
DVD space remaining
discSu
no. 7:00
2004/all6/20
HDDDVD
information
2004/
6/19 Sa 11:00
HDDTitle
Arrange
HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00
Narrowing
HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00
Jump
2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00
HDDDisc
information
2004/management
6/13 Su 9:00
HDD
Library
6/11 Fr 9:00
HDD 2004/ Exit
CH Genre
3
3
2
4
L1
L1
L2
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
2004/06/18
2004/06/17
2004/06/13
2004/06/13
2004/06/11
2004/06/ 9
etc
... 2004/06/ 9
07:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
10:27pm ...
Appoint character
An input window appears.
e.g. LIBRARY Title Summary
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
1/ 2
(All tTitles)
No.
Date
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
Day
Time
CH Genre
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
6/20 Su 7:00 pm 5
2004/06/20
6/19 Sa 11:00 pm 4
2004/06/19
6/18 Fr 7:00 pm 3
2004/06/18
Specific
Jump
6/17 Th
3
2004/06/17
9:00 pmCharacter
Character
Jump
6/13
2004/06/13
Su 11:00 String:
pm 2
6/13 Su 9:00 pm 4
2004/06/13
6/11 Fr 9:00 pm L1
2004/06/11
2004/06/ 9
6/ 9 We 9:00 pm L1
6/ 8 Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc
... 2004/06/ 9
07:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
07:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
10:27pm ...
Perform steps 1) to 3) below.
1) Put the cursor on the input area and press
ENTER.
The on-screen keyboard appears.
2) Enter the first characters (up to three
characters) of the title you are looking for.
3) Press to select “Jump” and press ENTER.
The title that starts with the specified characters is
selected.
Note
• The input window of “Specific Character Jump” can be
shifted by pressing the / buttons.
142
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
Title Name
2) Press / to select the jump method , then
press ENTER.
MENU
No.
Appoint character
no. 07:00pm ...
pm 5Appoint disc
2004/06/20
page
11:00pm ...
pm 4 Specific2004/06/19
pm
pm
pm
pm
pm
HDD 2004/ 6/ 9 We 9:00 pm
10:27
pm
2004/
6/
8
Tu
HDD
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
1/ 2
MENU
/
Date
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
6/20
6/19
6/18
6/17
6/13
6/13
6/11
6/ 9
6/ 8
Day
Time
CH Genre
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
2004/06/20
Su 7:00 pm 5
2004/06/19
Sa 11:00 pm 4
2004/06/18
Fr 7:00 pm 3
3 No. Jump
2004/06/17
ThSpecific
9:00 pmDisc
Disc
No.
0
1
–
0
2004/06/13
Su 11:00 pm 2
2004/06/13
Su 9:00 pm 4
2004/06/11
Fr 9:00 pm L1
2004/06/ 9
We 9:00 pm L1
Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc
... 2004/06/ 9
07:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
07:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
10:27pm ...
Perform steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press / to select the position to enter and
press ADJUST or / to enter the disc number.
Input 3 digits, and, if necessary A or B of disc. If
you input “–”, you can leave the digit and the lower
unspecified to search. For example, when “1 0 – –”
is input, titles of disc number such as 100, 100A,
102 are searched, and a title list starting from the
first found one appears. It is recommended that you
execute “Arrange by disc no.” beforehand.
2) Press ENTER.
The titles of the selected number disc are
displayed.
Specific page
An input window appears.
e.g.
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
1/ 2
MENU
No.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
Date
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
2004/
6/20
6/19
6/18
6/17
6/13
6/13
6/11
6/ 9
6/ 8
Day
Time
CH Genre
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
2004/06/20
Su 7:00 pm 5
2004/06/19
Sa 11:00 pm 4
2004/06/18
Fr 7:00 pm 3
Jump
3
2004/06/17
Th Specific
9:00 pm Page
Page
Number
–
–
–
2004/06/13
Su 11:00 pm 2
2004/06/13
Su 9:00 pm 4
2004/06/11
Fr 9:00 pm L1
2004/06/ 9
We 9:00 pm L1
Tu 10:27 pm L2 etc
... 2004/06/ 9
07:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
07:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
11:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
09:00pm ...
10:27pm ...
Perform steps 1) and 2) below.
1) Press /
number.
or ADJUST to enter the page
2) Press ENTER.
The selected page is displayed.
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Viewing Library data
Introduction
This section explains how to check and maintain the Library data.
“Lock”
Set the protection for the currently selected title.
The protection icon “ ” appears.
Viewing title information
Title information
e.g.
CONTENT Title informatin
MENU
Title : 006
3CH 2004 7/11(Su)
2004/07/11 10:00pm TV:3
(2:06:32)
Documentary/Culture(General)
Original
Chapter : 0001 (0:04:15)
Note
• When you change settings of a DVD-RAM disc, load
the DVD-RAM disc.
Viewing disc information
Playback
HDD
Media :
Mode : LP
Rate : 2. 2
Audio :
D/ M1
DVD Mode : Off
Saving : Off
10:00 pm
“Genre”:
The submenu appears.
Press the / buttons to select a genre, then press
the ENTER button.
A name of the selected genre and the icon appear.
Recording
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Title information”
by / then press ENTER.
You can view information about the selected title.
Disc information
e.g.
CONTENT Title informatin
MENU
Quick Menu
Title : 006
3CH 2004 7/11(Su)
Edit title name
2004/07/11
10:00pm TV:3
Edit chapter name
Rate : 2. 2
Audio :
D/ M1
DVD Mode : Off
Saving : Off
(2:06:32)
Documentary/Culture(General)
Original
Chapter : 0001 (0:04:15)
Disc Type
Writing Mode
Original Titles
Playlist Titles
Disc Status
Disc Lock
Finalize
Increment Rec
Increment Rec
Record Time (h:m)
DVD-RAM
1:51
VR mode
Remain Time (h:m)
4
(Current) S P 4.6Mbps /
D/M1: 0:10
0
1) MN 6.6Mbps / L-PCM : 0:05
Normal
)
4.6Mbps
/
S
P
D/M1: 0:10
2
Lock Off
D/M1: 0:22
3) L P 2.2Mbps /
–
D/M2: 0:07
4) MN 6.0Mbps /
–
D/M1: 0:15
5) MN 3.2Mbps /
Possible Edit Disc Number Edit Disc Name
To change the number or name of the DVD-RAM
disc:
1) Press / to select “Edit Disc Number” or
“Edit Disc Name”, then press the ENTER
button.
page 30, enter
2) Following the procedure on
a new name for the disc.
To change the disc number, press the ADJUST
button.
Note
• You can also change a disc name of a DVD-RW if it is not
finalized yet.
“Del chapter name”:
(Press the PICTURE SEARCH (
/ ) button to
display the chapter that you want to put a name for,
and select the chapter.)
“Record date & time”:
The cursor moves to the date so that you can correct
it.
143
Others
“Edit chapter name”:
(Press the PICTURE SEARCH (
/ ) button to
display the chapter that you want to put a name for,
and select the chapter.)
The on-screen keyboard appears.
page 30, enter a new
Following the procedure on
name for the chapter.
CONTENT Disc information
MENU
001 −
Function setup
“Edit title name”:
The on-screen keyboard appears.
page 30, enter a new
Following the procedure on
name for the title.
e.g.
Library
Del chapter name
Record date & time
Lock
Genre
HDD
Media
:
Exit
Mode
: LP
10:00 pm
1) From the Quick Menu, select “Dics
information” by / then press ENTER.
You can view information about the loaded disc.
Editing
You can do the following operations with the Quick
Menu.
(Press the QUICK MENU button to display the Quick
Menu. Press / buttons to select an item and press
ENTER.)
Library
Viewing Library data (Continued)
Maintenance of Library data
The recorder usually controls the Library database
system automatically. However, in the following cases,
you must maintain and create data manually.
Registering a disc manually
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc that contains information
you want to add.
2) Press LIBRARY.
• When you want to add information about a title, (for
example when you use a DVD-RAM disc recorded
on another device, etc.), to the Library system of the
recorder.
page 144).
→ “Registering a disc manually” (
• When the Library database memory is full. (Up to
3000 entries can be registered. When you reach this
limit, a message will appear and further additions to the
Library database will be rejected. Erase unnecessary
data to make space.)
page 145).
→ “Erasing unnecessary data” (
• When you want to rearrange the whole Library
information from the beginning.
page
→ “Deleting all the Library information only” (
145).
• When you save the Library data in another DVDRAM disc.
→ “Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc” (
page 146).
• When you import saved Library data back into the
recorder.
page 146).
→ “Re-installing the backup data” (
Note
• Save your Library data on a DVD-RAM disc. Importing
Library data replaces all current database information in
the recorder, including any data added after you saved the
data onto a DVD-RAM disc.
144
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select “Library management”,
then press ENTER.
A submenu appears.
e.g.
Summary
LIBRARY Title
(All tTitles)
MENU
No.
1/ 2
Quick Menu
Date
Day
Time
DVD space remaining
discSu
no. 7:00
2004/all6/20
HDDDVD
information
2004/
6/19 Sa 11:00
HDDTitle
Arrange
HDD 2004/ 6/18 Fr 7:00
Narrowing
HDD 2004/ 6/17 Th 9:00
Jump
2004/ 6/13 Su 11:00
HDDDisc
information
2004/
6/13 Su 9:00
HDD
Library management
6/11 Fr 9:00
HDD 2004/ Exit
CH Genre
pm L1
HDD 2004/ 6/ 9 We 9:00 pm L1
HDD 2004/ 6/ 8 Tu 10:27 pm L2
5) Press /
ENTER.
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Title Name
Add disc
information
pm 5 Del title
2004/06/20
07:00pm ...
by disc ...
2004/06/19 11:00pm
pm 4Del title information
Delete all DVD-RAM information
pm 3
2004/06/18 07:00pm ...
Delete all library information
3
2004/06/17
09:00pm
...
pm
Delete disc no. from library
2004/06/13 11:00pm ...
pm 2
Create backup
2004/06/13 09:00pm ...
pm 4
Re-inst all backup
etc
...
2004/06/11 09:00pm ...
2004/06/ 9 09:00pm ...
2004/06/ 9 10:27pm ...
to select “Add disc”, then press
6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
All title information is registered.
Notes
• To use title information in a DVD-RAM disc recorded on
another device, as the Library data of the recorder, be sure
to follow the procedure of “Registering a disc manually” to
add said data to the Library system. This information
cannot be added automatically.
• If you record content on a DVD-RAM disc on the recorder
and edit the content on the other device, Library data of the
disc may be lost or the disc may not function properly.
• Unless a DVD-RAM disc is registered to the recorder,
information of current or future titles recorded on the disc,
will not registered.
• By registering a disc manually, several discs in same
number consequently may be registered. In this case, the
remaining time is displayed per disc or page. Execution of
“Edit Disc Number” (
page 143) is recommended.
Deleting all the Library information only
When the Library database is full (3000 entries).→
Select “Del title information”.
Use this feature when you want to rearrange the
whole Library information from the beginning.
1) Press LIBRARY.
1) Press LIBRARY.
/
to select a title.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select “Library management”
then press ENTER.
6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Library data of the title selected in step 2) is
erased.
4) Press / to select “Delete All DVD-RAM
information” or “Delete all library information”.
Delete all DVD-RAM information:
Deletes all Library information from the DVD-RAM
disc, leaving the Library information on the HDD.
Delete all library information:
Deletes all Library information from the HDD and
DVD-RAM disc.
5) Press ENTER.
6) Press
/
to select “Yes” and press ENTER.
Editing
To cancel, select “No”.
3) Press / to select “Library management” and
press ENTER.
Playback
5) Press / to select “Del title information”, then
press ENTER.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
Recording
2) Press
Introduction
Erasing unnecessary data
To delete information of all titles in the specified data
→ Select “Del title information by disc”.
1) Press LIBRARY.
/
to select a title.
A number of an inactive disc can be deleted from the
Library Management, so that it can be assigned to a
new disc.
1) Press LIBRARY.
4) Press / to select “Library management”
then press ENTER.
2) Press QUICK MENU.
5) Press / to select “Del title information by
disc”, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
4) Press / to select “Del disc no. from Library”,
then press ENTER.
Others
6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Library data of all titles in the disc you selected in
step 2) is erased.
3) Press / to select “Library management”,
then press ENTER.
Function setup
3) Press QUICK MENU.
Library
2) Press
Forced deletion of disc numbers
5) Press ADJUST to select a number to delete,
then press ENTER.
Note
• Deleting a disc number also deletes data of all titles in the
disc.
145
Library
Viewing Library data (Continued)
Saving the Library data in a DVD-RAM disc
1) Load a DVD-RAM disc to save the Library data.
2) Press LIBRARY.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select “Library management”,
then press ENTER.
5) Press / to select “Create backup”, then
press ENTER.
6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
Re-installing the backup data
1) Load the DVD-RAM disc containing the Library
database.
2) Press LIBRARY.
3) Press QUICK MENU.
4) Press / to select “Library management”,
then press ENTER.
5) Press / to select “Re-inst all backup”, then
press ENTER.
6) Press / to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
To cancel, select “No”.
Note
• Do not use a DVD-RAM disc which contains Library
Management data registered to another recorder for
backup data storage. Library Management format may vary
depending on the model. Adding data of a new format onto
the said disc may prevent the data of the older format from
being re-installed.
146
Library
HDD
DVD-RAM
Checking remaining space
Introduction
You can check the remaining space of each disc prior to recording.
Viewing a number and space of a disc
Viewing remaining space
DVD space remaining
DVD all disc no.
To recheck the remaining space for a different “AV
record quality” setting
Playback
1) Press QUICK MENU.
The Quick Menu appears.
Note
• You can rearrange the list by selecting “Arrange”,
“Narrowing” or “Jump” from the Quick Menu.
2) Press / to select “AV record quality” then
press ENTER.
e.g.
LIBRARY DVD All disc No. Summary
MENU
1/ 2
AV record quality
6/22 (Tu) 2:49 pm
Current defaul. Manual
6.6 L-PCM
–––
DVD
Name SP
Manual Disc
6.6 L-PCM
4.6 D/M1Estimated
HDD Setting 1
Custom
setting vol.1
Spanish
Conversation
SpanishSetting
ConversationMode
vol.2
1
Manual
Movie
2
SP
Live Concert
Rate
6.6
4.6
Audio quality
L-PCM
D/M1
3
LP
2.2
D/M1
4
Manual
6.0
D/M2
5
Editing
No.
001
002
003
004
Recording
1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD all disc no.”
by / then press ENTER.
You can view numbers, names and estimated
remaining spaces about all the registered discs.
1) From the Quick Menu, select “DVD space
remaining” by / then press ENTER.
You can view the recording titles and the estimated
space remaining per disc.
20min.
10min.
5min.
2min.
Manual
3.2
D/M1
Total recording time: 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
AV quality calculation can be changed from Quick Menu.
Library
3) Press ADJUST and select the setting (
161).
page
4) Press ENTER.
Function setup
Note
• It is recommended that beforehand you select a desired
title or disc by “arrange” selection then execute “DVD
space remaining”, because the recorder lists the remaining
space from the specified disc or the one which contains the
specified title.
Others
147
Function Setup
You can change the default settings to customize
performance to your preference.
Customizing the Function
Settings
Function Setup
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Customizing the Function Settings
You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.
1
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
MENU
TOP MENU
RETURN
ANGLE SUBTITLE
HDD
AUDIO
CHANNEL
TIMESLIP
During stop, press SETUP.
The following setup display appears.
SETUP
e.g.
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
English
DVD audio language
English
No subtitle
DVD subtitle language
DVD d
i
l O
DVD
INSTANT REPLAY INSTANT SKIP
EASY
NAVI
REC MENU EDIT MENU
CONTENT MENU
SK
W
O
IP
SL
LIBRARY
2
Press / to select the icon of a group that
contains a desired item, then press ENTER.
SETUP
For details on each setting, see the next page.
e.g. When “Display settings” is selected:
ENTER
e.g.
E
/A
DJ
SE
AM
AR
FR
CH
ENTER
US
RE
TU
PI C
PLAY
T
PAUSE
STOP
Display settings
TV shape
4:3LB
On
On screen display
25%
Transparency
Startup screen
On
Screen protector
On
Background
Blue
Closed caption
TV
QUICK MENU
REC
SETUP
VCR Plus+ EXTEND REC MODE TV CODE
T.SEARCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
Press /
ENTER.
to select a desired item, then press
CLEAR
ENTER
DELETE
SETUP
ENTER
0
+10
4
Refer to the explanations on pages beginning
from 154, to change the selection by / or
other buttons, then press ENTER.
Open the lid.
ENTER
Notes
• The SETUP button can function
even during normal playback.
However some items may be
grayed out and they cannot be
selected. In this case, try again
after playback is stopped.
• The SETUP button does not
function during recording,
Recorded Title Play, Chase Play
or Pause TV modes.
150
5
• To select another item in the same group, repeat
steps 3 to 4.
• To shift to another group, press the O button then
repeat steps 2 to 4.
Press SETUP.
SETUP
The setup display disappears and the setting is
completed.
Details
Page
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
To select a preferred language for disc menus.
154
To select a preferred language for the sound track.
154
To select a preferred language for subtitles.
154
To turn on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier to
hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour playback.
155
To turn on or off the vocal output during DVD KARAOKE disc
playback.
155
DVD-VIDEO
DVD parental lock
To turn the parental lock function on or off.
155
To turn on or off a feature that automatically stops playback
after a title has been viewed.
156
To use the menu screen when playing a PBC-controllable
VIDEO CD.
156
To select the resolution of still pictures. (Field/Frame)
157
To select the black level of playback pictures.
157
To select from standard or three customized picture settings.
157
To customize picture quality settings and store them.
157
To select the system of output signal. (Only when connected
to a PROGRESSIVE TV.)
157
To select a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.
158
To select an output sound format corresponding to your
system connection.
158
To turn on or off expansive virtual surround sound effects from
just two speakers.
158
To monitor and record SAP broadcast.
158
Introduction
Setting
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-VIDEO
DVD subtitle language
Recording
DVD audio language
DVD-VIDEO
DVD dynamic range control
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Playback
Karaoke vocal
DVD-VIDEO
DVD title stop
DVD-RW
DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Editing
PBC
Picture/audio settings
Pause/still
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Black level
DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Custom picture select
HDD
DVD-R
VCD
Custom picture setting
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
DVD-R
VCD
Progressive conversion
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
DVD-R
VCD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
DVD-R
VCD
Audio out select
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
DVD-R
CD
Virtual surround
HDD
SAP
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
(Continued)
151
Others
Play DNR
HDD
Function setup
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
Library
HDD
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Setting
Details
Page
Display settings
TV shape
To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your
TV.
159
DVD-R
To turn on or deactivate the operational status display (e.g., )
on the TV screen.
159
DVD-R
To select the transparency of the GUI relative to background
pictures.
159
DVD-R
To turn on or off the start-up screen setting that makes the
background picture appear automatically when turning on the power.
159
To turn the screen saver on or off.
159
Background
To select a display status when no video signals are present.
159
Closed caption
To select where you turn on or off closed caption.
159
To turn on or off the confirmation beeper announcing when
each remote command is received.
160
To select whether or not a buzzer sounds when dubbing and
so forth is finished.
160
To switch the codes that operate the recorder.
160
To set the width to skip when the INSTANT SKIP button is
pressed once.
160
DVD-R
To set the width to go back when the INSTANT REPLAY
button is pressed once.
160
DVD-R
To select the position of the thumbnail image counting from
the beginning of the title that has been recorded.
160
To activate resume play per title or continuous play.
160
To select an interval of still picture display.
160
To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture) files
and MP3/WMA (audio) files.
160
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
On screen display
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
CD
Transparency
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
CD
Startup screen
Screen protector
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
DVD-R
CD
Operational settings
Operation beep
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
DVD-R
CD
Recording complete beep
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
IR code
Instant skip interval
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
CD
Instant replay interval
HDD
DVD-VIDEO
DVD-RAM DVD-RW
VCD
CD
Title thumbnail point
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD/RAM title play
HDD
DVD-RAM
Still group interval
DVD-RAM
Priority contents
152
Details
Page
DVD recorder operation
AV record quality
161
To make further setting when you cannot adjust the image
quality with “Custom picture setting” of the “Picture/audio
settings”.
161
To adjust the level of recording sound.
161
To set the aspect ratio for DVD-R/RW recording.
162
To set the audio for DVD-R/RW recording.
162
To set whether or not chapters are to be automatically created
at a specified interval for DVD-R/RW recording.
162
To activate or deactivate the 3D digital noise reduction.
162
To activate or deactivate the 3D digital filter to execute Y/C
(Brightness/Color) separation.
162
To turn on or off a function that makes a recording
automatically onto the HDD when the remainder of the DVDRAM disc becomes less than 10 minutes or when a disc is not
loaded.
163
To register the frequently used genre in the menu.
163
Eco. mode
To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby
mode.
163
HDD auto stop
To turn on or off a power saving function that stops the HDD
after a certain period of inactivity.
163
To delete all the titles recorded on the HDD, leaving the
Library information on the DVD-RAM disc.
164
To initialize the HDD.
164
To perform physical formatting of a DVD-RAM disc.
29
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Picture record mode
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Audio input level
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Aspect ratio (Video mode)
DVD-R
DVD compatible mode
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
DVD-Video:CHP create
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Rec DNR
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
3D Y/C separation
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Relay recording
HDD
DVD-RAM
Editing
HDD
Playback
DVD-RW
Recording
To select a set of picture and sound quality settings for
manual programme recording.
HDD
Introduction
Setting
Library
Management settings
Genre setting
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
HDD
All HDD titles delete
HDD
HDD
DVD-RAM physical format
DVD-RAM
Software version
To display the version of the software. The version is only
displayed and cannot be set.
DVD drive software
To display the version of the DVD drive software.
The version is only displayed and it cannot be set.
Initial settings
See
page 28, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”.
153
Others
HDD format
Function setup
HDD
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
e.g.
DVD-VIDEO
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
English
English
DVD audio language
No subtitle
DVD subtitle language
DVD dynamic range control On
Karaoke vocal
Off
English:
To display disc menus in English.
French:
To display disc menus in French.
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from the Language Code List
(
page 171).
Spanish:
To display disc menus in Spanish.
SETUP
Others:
To make a further language choice.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4)
below.
e.g.
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
English
English
DVD audio language
No subtitle
DVD subtitle language
DVD dynamic range control On
Code
E N
Code
E N
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from the Language Code List
(
page 171).
2) Select the first character by pressing the
/ buttons (or the ADJUST button).
3) Press the / buttons to shift. Select the
second character by pressing the /
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
4) Press the ENTER button.
Note
• Some DVD video discs may be played in a different
language from that you selected. A prior language may be
programmed by the disc.
SETUP
2) Select the first character by pressing the
/ buttons (or the ADJUST button).
DVD Subtitle Language
3) Press the / buttons to shift. Select the
second character by pressing the /
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
English:
DVD-VIDEO
To display subtitles in English.
French:
To display subtitles in French.
4) Press the ENTER button.
Spanish:
To display subtitles in Spanish.
Note
• Some DVD video discs may not include your preset
language. In this case, the recorder automatically displays
disc menus consistent with the disc’s initial language
setting.
DVD audio language
No Subtitle:
To disable subtitles.
Others:
To make a further choice.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 4)
below.
e.g.
DVD-VIDEO
English:
To play sound tracks recorded in English.
French:
To play sound tracks recorded in French.
Spanish:
To play sound tracks recorded in Spanish.
Others:
To make further choices.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) - 4)
below.
154
DVD player settings
DVD disc menu language
English
DVD audio language
English
DVD subtitle language
No subtitle
DVD dynamic range control On
Karaoke vocal
Off
Code
– –
1) Obtain the language code of the preferred
language from the Language Code List
(
page 171).
SETUP
2) Select the first character by pressing the
/ buttons (or the ADJUST button).
Introduction
DVD parental lock
4) Press the ENTER button.
DVD dynamic range control
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Off:
The DVD Dynamic Range Control does not function.
The DVD Dynamic Range Control functions.
Karaoke vocal
DVD-VIDEO
Off:
On:
Select this to activate the Parental Lock function or to
change the setting.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1) – 3)
below.
Off:
Deactivate the Parental Lock function.
After pressing the ENTER button, follow steps 1)
below.
1) Enter a 4-digit password by using the
number buttons, then press the ENTER
button.
If you make a mistake entering your password,
press the CLEAR button before pressing the
ENTER button, and re-enter the correct
password.
2) Press the / / / buttons to move the
cursor. Then press the ADJUST button to
enter the code of a country/area whose
standards were used to rate the DVD video
disc, referring to the list below.
Function setup
Notes
• This function is available only for a disc recorded in Dolby
Digital format.
• Depending on the disc you play back, the actual effect of
this function differs.
• Depending on discs, it may not be evident whether the
disc is compatible with the Parental Lock function.
Make sure that the Parental Lock function you set is
activated correctly.
Library
On:
Important
Editing
HDD
Turns on or off a function that makes faint sounds easier
to hear even if you lower the volume during late-hour
playback.
DVD video discs equipped with the Parental Lock
function have a predetermined limitation level. The
limitation level or limitation method may differ depending
on the disc. For example the total disc may not be played
back, or an extreme violent scene maybe cut or replaced
automatically by another scene.
Playback
Notes
• Some DVD video discs may be set to display subtitles in a
different language from that you selected. A prior subtitle
language may be programmed by the disc.
• Some DVD video discs allow you to change subtitle
selections only via the disc menu. In this case, press the
MENU button and choose the appropriate subtitle
language from the selection on the disc menu.
DVD-VIDEO
Recording
3) Press the / buttons to shift. Select the
proceeding character by pressing the /
buttons (or the ADJUST button).
The main vocal sound is not output.
The main vocal sound is output.
(Continued)
Notes
• This function is available only for a DVD KARAOKE disc
recorded in Dolby Digital Multi Channel format.
• If you want to enjoy the KARAOKE function, connect an
amplifier or other such device to this recorder.
155
Others
On:
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Country/Area
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM
CANADA
CHINA
CHINA HONG KONG
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
INDONESIA
ITALY
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
PHILIPPINES
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
SINGAPORE
SPAIN
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
TAIWAN
THAILAND
UNITED KINGDOM
UNITED STATES
Code
AU
BE
CA
CN
HK
DK
FI
FR
DE
ID
IT
JP
MY
NL
NO
PH
RU
SG
ES
SE
CH
TW
TH
GB
US
3) Select the desired limitation level by
pressing the / buttons, and then press
the ENTER button.
To change the limitation level of the Parental
Lock function
Follow step 1) - 3) above.
To change the password
1) Press the STOP button 4 times after
selecting “On” and “Off” in order, and then
press the ENTER button.
The password is cleared.
2) Enter a new 4-digit password by using the
number buttons.
3) Press the ENTER button.
DVD title stop
DVD-RW
DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Off:
Plays back all following titles on the disc after the
current title has been viewed.
On:
Recorder is stopped after playback of current title
being viewed is completed.
PBC
VCD
e.g.
Off:
Selects normal playback without using the menu
screen of a PBC-controllable VIDEO CD.
DVD parental lock level setting
Area code
U S
Level 8
Prohibited
Level 7
Allowed
Level 6
Level 5
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
On:
Selects playback using the menu screen of a PBCcontrollable VIDEO CD.
SETUP
Unless the Parental Lock function is set to
“Off”, a disc that has a higher limitation level
than your selected limitation level cannot be
played back. For example, if you select level 7,
discs exceeding level 8 are locked and cannot
be played back.
When “US” is selected, its limitation level
corresponds to the following settings.
Level 7 : NC-17
Level 3 : PG
Level 6 : R
Level 1 : G
Level 4 : PG13
156
Introduction
Picture/Audio settings
Pause/Still
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Normal setting. Pause the moving image without
blurring.
Brightness
(0) Darker ⇔ Brighter (7)
Frame:
Displays high resolution still image.
Contrast
(–7) Lower ⇔ Higher (0)
Black level
Color
VCD
Playback
DVD-VIDEO
Recording
Auto:
2) Press the / buttons to select adjustable
items, and then press the / buttons to
select each parameter.
(–7) Duller ⇔ Brighter (0)
Normal:
Edge Enhance
Normal black level.
(OFF) Soft ⇔ Sharp (ON)
Enhanced:
To display deeper, richer black than in “Normal” setting.
Custom picture select
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Select from between 4 picture settings (Normal, Setting
1-3) you stored in the memory.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
You can adjust fine picture quality and store up to 3
custom picture settings in the memory of the recorder.
e.g.
Setting 1
Setting 2
Setting 3
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Auto:
Select this position normally.
The DVD player automatically detects source content,
film or video, of playback source, and converts that
signal in the progressive output format in an
appropriate method.
Video:
The DVD player filters video signal, and converts it in
the progressive output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of video content pictures.
Film:
SETUP
The DVD player converts film content pictures in the
progressive output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of film content pictures.
The progressive output feature will be most effective
under this selection.
Note
• Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled.
157
Others
Picture/Audio settings
Pause / Still
Auto
Black level
Normal
Custom picture select
Normal
Custom picture setting
Auto
Progressive conversion
Play DNR
Audio out select
Bitstream
Virtual surround
Off
SAP
Off
HDD
There are two types of source content in pictures
recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures
recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video
content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per
second). Make this selection according to the type of
content being viewed.
Function setup
1) Press the / button to select a desired
setting from 3 settings, and then press the
ENTER button.
Progressive conversion
Library
Custom picture setting
Editing
3) After adjusting the items, press the ENTER
button.
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Play DNR
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Selects a setting for playback at a reduced noise level.
Press the / buttons to select an item then select “On”
or “Off” using the / buttons.
3D-DNR:
Not activated.
On:
Reduces the noise levels of brightness signals and
color signals present in the video signal during
playback.
Mosquito NR:
Select this when a 2ch digital stereo amplifier is
connected to this recorder. When you play back a disc
recorded in Dolby Digital or MPEG1 format, the sound
is converted to the PCM (2ch) format and output.
Virtual surround
HDD
Off:
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
This lets you playback discs with acoustic effects having
greater depth and presence even when using only two
speakers.
Not activated.
On:
Reduces mosquito (flicker) noise occurring in the
contour sections of images.
Block NR:
Off:
Virtual surround effect not activated.
On:
Off:
Virtual surround effect activated.
Not activated.
On:
Reduces noise that appears in the form of blocks
(block noise) in a portion of the screen during
playback of images with rapid movement.
DNR is the abbreviation for Digital Noise Reduction.
Notes
• DNR effects vary depending on the disc.
• Detailed images may no longer be visible depending on
the scene due to the effects of DNR.
• Depending on the disc or scene, “On” may produce
undesirable picture artifacts or increase noises on
contours. In this instance, select “Off.”
• While you are using the zoom feature, “DNR” does not
function.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Notes
• This function is only activated when playing back a disc
recorded with Dolby Digital.
• This function is only activated when “Audio Out Select” is
set to “PCM” if the BITSTREAM/PCM jack of this DVD
recorder is connected to an amplifier or similar device.
• When the virtual surround effect is activated, Dolby
Progressive Sound may be deactivated or sound differently
than usual.
• When the virtual surround effect is activated, the volume
may sound differently than usual.
• Set “Virtual surround” to “Off” if the audio sounds distorted.
Manufactured under license from QSound Labs, Inc. U.S. patent
Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and 5,440,638 and various foreign
counterpart. Copyright QSound Labs, Inc. 1998-2002. QXpanderTM
is a trademark of QSound Labs, Inc. All rights reserved.
SAP
Audio out select
VCD
CD
Selects an output sound format corresponding to your
audio system connection.
For details about output sound selection, see
page 75.
Bitstream:
Select this when an amplifier equipped with built-in
Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG1 decoder is connected to
this recorder.
When you play back a disc recorded in Dolby Digital,
DTS or MPEG1 format, digital audio signal is output.
158
Select this when a TV or other audio device is
connected to this recorder via the ANALOG output
connectors.
PCM:
Off:
HDD
Analog 2ch:
SAP (Second Audio Program broadcast) is separate
audio program, usually broadcast in a second language
with the main language.
Off:
The main sound is received.
On:
SAP sound (second language) is received.
Introduction
Display settings
TV Shape
HDD
Background
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
For details on this setting, see “TV shape setting”
page 44, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
(
Selects a screen color when receiving no video signals
such as selecting a non-broadcasting channel.
Off:
No color.
Black:
Recording
Select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your
TV.
Black is displayed.
On screen display
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Blue:
VCD
CD
Off:
Deactivates the operational status display (e.g.,
the TV screen.
) on
On:
Activates the operational status display (e.g.,
the TV screen.
Blue is displayed.
Important
• Depending on signal reception, the Background setting
may be cleared. To prevent this, set this function to
“Off”.
) on
Editing
Closed caption
Transparency
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Playback
HDD
CD
Selects the transparency of the GUI and its relationship
to the background image.
To select where you turn on or off closed caption.
Off:
To disable closed caption.
TV:
0% : 25% : 50%
Startup screen
Library
Closed caption data is decoded on the connected TV.
To turn on or off closed caption, operate the connected
TV.
Recorder:
Off:
On:
The startup screen appears automatically when
turning on the power.
Screen protector
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
Notes
• While the recorder is sending signals in the progressive
output format, closed caption is disabled regardless of this
setting.
• Depending on the signal condition, closed caption may not
be displayed properly. In this case, select “Off.”
Others
To reduce TV screen damage (image burn), this function
disengages the pause mode of a playback image. The
display returns to the normal TV screen when the
recorder remains idle for more than 15 minutes. In time
slip mode, the playback pause is released.
If this function is set to “On”, the recorder, if freezes, may
return to the normal by leaving it for about 15 minutes or
longer.
Off:
Deactivates the screen protector function.
On:
Activates the screen protector function.
Note
• Toshiba does not guarantee that this function protects the
TV screen by all means.
Function setup
Closed caption data is decoded on this recorder.
You cannot turn off closed caption on the connected
TV.
The startup screen is not displayed.
159
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Operational settings
Operation beep
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
Instant replay interval
VCD
CD
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
Turn on or off a confirmation beeper announcing when a
command is received.
Sets how far back is replayed when the INSTANT
REPLAY button is pressed.
Off:
5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.
CD
Turns off the beep sound.
On:
Title thumbnail point
Turns on the beep sound.
HDD
Note
• You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this
setting.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
For recorded titles, sets how far a scene from the start is
set as the title thumbnail.
0 sec. : 3 sec. : 10 sec. : 35 sec. : 1 min. : 5 min.
Recording complete beep
HDD
Note
• Thumbnails can also be changed to other scenes.
See
page 100.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
This is used to set whether or not a buzzer sounds when
dubbing and so forth is finished.
HDD/RAM title play
Off:
HDD
Buzzer does not sound.
DVD-RAM
Sets the resume play per title.
On:
Buzzer sounds.
Title resume:
Note
• You cannot turn off beeps for alerts irrespective of this
setting.
IR Code
Switches the codes to operate the recorder. If you use
the second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video
recorders, set the different remote codes for each
recorder to avoid confusion in the response of the
recorders.
For details about this setting, refer to “Operating the
second and third TOSHIBA HDD/DVD video recorders
page 48,
with the remote control of this recorder” (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
Remembers the point where you stop playback.
Allows you to resume the playback from that point.
Serial playback:
You can play back titles (Original, Playlist) stored in
the HDD or a DVD-RAM continuously.
Because there is no division between titles, the
recorder remembers only the last point where you
stopped playback.
Still group interval
DVD-RAM
Sets an interval for display of still pictures (in seconds)
when playing back a collection of still images.
1 sec. : 2 sec. : 3 sec. : 5 sec. : 10 sec. : Default
DR 1 : DR 2 : DR 3
Priority Contents
Instant skip interval
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R DVD-VIDEO
VCD
CD
To select the playback priority between JPEG (picture)
files and MP3/WMA (audio) files.
Sets how much time is skipped when the INSTANT SKIP
button is pressed.
Photo: JPEG files take priority over MP3/WMA files.
Audio: MP3/WMA files take priority over JPEG files.
5 sec. : 10 sec. : 30 sec. : 5 min.
Note
If this selection does not correspond to disc contents, the
recorder will take a longer time to start playback of the disc.
160
Introduction
DVD recorder operation
Picture record mode
AV record quality
HDD
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
e.g.
AV record quality
DVD
SP
Rate
6.6
4.6
–––
4.6 D/M1
Audio quality
L-PCM
D/M1
3
LP
2.2
D/M1
4
Manual
6.0
D/M2
5
Manual
3.2
D/M1
Total recording time: 71min.
(with 4.7 GB unused)
SETUP
1) Press the / / / buttons to select the
desired item (“Mode”, “Rate”, or “Audio quality”).
2) Press the ADJUST button to change the setting
of each item.
1) Press the / / / buttons to select a media
to record on (HDD or DVD).
You can confirm the available recording time for
the selected setting on the bottom screen.
3) Press the ENTER button.
• This setting changes the video signal to record and the
recorded signal is not returned to the original state even
when this setting is changed after recording. When
duplicating from VHS tape, if you can check the video
recording state beforehand, we recommend first playing
back for a while and checking the overall brightness
tendency, then setting an appropriate mode.
Standard:
The brightness of signals received with this recorder
and external input signals is adjusted automatically.
This is normally the setting to use.
Mode 1:
This setting is used to record the signals darker when
the screen is too bright.
Mode 2, 3, 4:
As the number rises, the signals are recorded brighter.
Use these modes to adjust the brightness.
Audio input level
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Sets the audio input level of recorded sound.
Press the / buttons to select the desired item, and
then press the / buttons to adjust the input level.
TV/Cable (L):
Others
Notes
• A combination of picture and sound quality settings can be
set for HDD and DVD-RAM respectively.
• You can change the combination of picture and sound
quality settings also by displaying the Quick Menu on a
LIBRARY MENU or during stop mode, then selecting “AV
Record Quality”. Either of the above methods updates the
setting of this recorder.
• If you set “SP” or “LP”, you cannot select “L-PCM”.
• Depending on the sound quality settings, the upper limit for
the picture quality setting differs.
• You can adjust the manual rate for picture quality by
0.2 Mbps from 2.0 to 9.2. (You cannot set the rate from 1.4
to 2.0.)
Important:
Function setup
2) Press the ADJUST button to change the
setting.
(Only use this setting when you cannot adjust the
brightness satisfactorily with the Custom picture setting in
Page 157) of this
the Picture/Audio settings (
recorder.)
Library
• To apply the combination of picture and sound
quality settings.
/
Editing
• To make a combination of picture and sound
quality settings.
Press the / buttons to select the source, and the
buttons to select the mode.
Playback
HDD Setting 1
Manual 6.6 L-PCM
Custom setting
Setting
Mode
1
Manual
2
SP
Adjusts problems with the brightness of video signals of
TV broadcasts or other external input.
Recording
You can select from 5 combined picture and sound
quality recording settings prior to actual recording.
Actual selection applied becomes the default setting for
the normal recording or programmed recording.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Sets the input level for the left channel.
(R):
Sets the input level for the right channel.
Line1, 2, 3 (L):
Sets the input level for the left channel of the external
input connectors.
(R):
Sets the input level for the right channel of the external
input connectors.
161
Function Setup
Customizing the function settings (Continued)
Aspect ratio(Video mode)
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-Video:CHP create
DVD-RW
DVD-R
To set the aspect ratio when recording onto a DVD-R/RW
disc.
To set whether chapters are to be automatically created
at a selected interval during DVD-R/RW recording.
4:3:
Off:
Fixes the aspect ratio at 4:3.
16:9:
5 min. : 10 min. : 15 min. : 20 min.
Fixes the aspect ratio at 16:9.
Note
• When the bit rate on “AV record quality” is set to
“1.4(Mbps)”, pictures are recorded in 4:3 aspect ratio even
if “16:9” is selected.
DVD compatible mode
HDD
Chapters are not set.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
To set the interval at which chapters are automatically
created to 5, 10, 15 or 20 minutes.
Note
• The number of chapters has the upper limit, which varies
depending on the disc condition. If the number reaches it,
no more chapters are created.
Rec DNR
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
To set whether or not recording is to be performed in the
format for which recording is allowed by the DVD-Video
standard (video, audio and other data) during recording.
Selects the level of 3D digital noise reduction that can
reduce noises of a picture with many noise, depending
on pictures.
This selection is important for contents when recorded on
this recorder, if they will be copied to DVD-R/RW.
Off:
Off:
For recording of contents which will not be copied to
DVD-R/RW.
Both the main and SAP sounds are recorded.
When recording directly on a DVD-R/RW disc, this is
ineffective. The recorder will automatically regard this
as “Main,” and record sound of the main channel only
in stereo. Select “Main” or “SAP” for a DVD-R/RW
recording.
Main:
Records sound of the main channel only in stereo.
SAP:
Deactivates the 3D digital noise reduction.
On:
Sets the normal level.
Expanded:
Increases digital noise reduction.
Notes
• When you set “Rec DNR” to “On” or “Expanded” and set
“3D Y/C Separation” to “On”, the priority changes
depending on the input selection if you select the S-video
input. “Rec DNR” has priority, when you select the built-in
tuner or composite input, “3D Y/C Separation” has priority.
• If you want to avoid an afterimage, set this setting to “Off”.
Records sound of the SAP channel only in stereo.
3D Y/C separation
Notes
• When you select the manual rate of the picture quality
between 3.0 and 3.8 and set this mode to “Main” or “SAP”,
the picture quality may become lower than when you set
this mode to “Off”.
• You can change the setting from the Quick Menu.
• It is no use to make this selection when dubbing. Select
when recording.
HDD
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
The 3D digital comb filter executes Y/C (Brightness/
Color) separation to reduce the color irregularity or cross
color interference.
Off:
Deactivates this function.
In an area where the broadcast reception is poor,
select this mode.
On:
Activates this function.
In normal conditions, select this.
Note
• Refer to the “Notes” in the above “Rec DNR”.
162
Introduction
Management settings
Relay recording
HDD
DVD-RAM
Off:
Deactivates this function.
HDD
This registers a frequently used genre name onto the
menu. Genre names registered here are displayed in the
“Genre” on the Quick Menu.
1) Press the / buttons to select a position in
the “Current Genre List” you want to
change, then press the ENTER button.
On:
A list of genres appears.
You can turn the pages using the
Playback
Activates this function.
button.
2) Press the / buttons to select a genre,
then press the ENTER button.
A list of genre names appears.
3) Press the / buttons to select a genre
name, then press the ENTER button.
The selected genre name replaces the previous
Editing
Notes
• The Relay recording does not function during the Rate
Conversion Dubbing or Line-U Dubbing.
• Even if you set “Relay recording” to “Off”, A-B programmed
recording will be performed on the HDD.
• During playback of the HDD when you start Relay
recording and the CONTENT MENU is displayed, playback
stops.
• During Relay recording, HDD Title Playback is not
available.
• When the remaining space on the HDD is small, Relay
recording does not function.
• Time slip function (
page 63) is not possible while “On”
is selected.
DVD-RAM DVD-RW DVD-R
Recording
Turn on or off a function that makes a recording
automatically onto the HDD when the remaining space of
a DVD-RAM disc is Reduced to less than 10 minutes or
when a disc is not loaded.
Genre setting
one of the position you selected at step 1).
4) Repeat steps 1) to 3) to register genre names.
Library
5) When genre names are registered, press the
O button to return to the “Management
Settings” menu.
Eco. Mode
Off:
Sets the front panel display to turn on in the standby
mode.
Function setup
To set the front panel display to turn on/off in the standby
mode.
On:
HDD auto stop
HDD
Off:
Turns off an HDD auto stop mode.
On:
Turns HDD drive off after recorder is idle for
approximately 5 minutes.
When the PLAY or REC button is pressed for the HDD
while the HDD drive is turned off, it takes a little longer
time to play or record.
163
Others
Sets the front panel display to turn off in the standby
mode.
All HDD titles delete
HDD Format
HDD
HDD
This deletes all the titles on the HDD. Only the recorded
contents are deleted, so the DVD-RAM disc Library
information and reservation history are left as is and can
continue to be used.
Initializes the HDD.
Normally it is not required to initialize the HDD. However
when the HDD does not function correctly, initializing the
HDD may solve the situation. If you initialize the HDD, all
titles and library information stored in the HDD are
permanently deleted.
All titles are about to be deleted in
spite of title protected. Proceed?
Yes
e.g.
No
HDD Format
Entire disc contents including
library will be erased
if disc is formatted. Proceed?
1) Press the / buttons to select “Yes”, then
press the ENTER button.
Start
2) Confirm the message, press the /
buttons to select “Yes” and then press the
ENTER button.
Cancel
0%
Format
1) Press the / buttons to select “Start”,
then press the ENTER button.
Deletion of all titles starts.
If you want to cancel the deleting, select “No”.
2) Confirm the message, press the /
buttons to select “Start”, and then press the
ENTER button.
Note
• If you periodically execute All HDD titles delete, this holds
down fragmentation (increased complexity) of the disc and
maintains good operability.
Initialization of the HDD starts.
If you want to cancel the initializing, select
“Cancel”.
DVD-RAM Physical Format
DVD-RAM
See
page 29.
Setting of picture and sound quality for recording
Sound setting
D/M1
D/M2
L-PCM
Picture quality setting
DVD
HDD
DVD
HDD
DVD
HDD
SP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
LP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
MN
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
164
Others
Before calling service personnel
Error codes on the display
window
Recording duration
Language Code List
Specification
Others
Before calling service personnel
If you experience any of the following difficulties while using this unit, check the list below before consulting your
nearest Toshiba dealer.
Power
Playback
The power is not turned on.
A DVD or CD does not play.
• The power cord is not connected securely.
→ Connect the power cord securely.
• The format of the recorded data does not correspond
to this recorder, or the region number is neither “1”
nor “ALL”.
→ Check the disc.
• A defective or dirty disc is inside.
→ Change the disc.
• The HDD mode is selected.
→ Press the DVD button.
Connection to your TV
There is no TV picture.
• The video cable to this recorder and your TV is not
connected securely.
→ Connect the video cable to this recorder and your
TV securely.
• The input select on your TV is not set property.
→ Select the input to which this recorder is
connected.
TV reception
There is no picture.
• The antenna cable is not connected securely.
→ Reconnect the antenna cable securely.
The HDD does not play.
• The DVD mode is selected.
→ Press the HDD button.
During playback, picture noise appears.
• Picture noise may appear in the following cases. It is
not a malfunction.
→ There is picture noise in the original recording.
→ Weather, reception conditions may cause noise.
→ The data transmission rate is set to low.
→ The image data processing of this recorder cannot
follow dynamic movement on the screen. (Low
video data rate)
→ A physical error has occured on the DVD disc.
There is poor reception.
• Channel settings are not completed.
→ Set the channel settings.
• The antenna cable is not connected securely.
→ Reconnect the antenna cable securely.
• Antenna signal is poor.
→ Consult your dealer for adjustment.
166
If an error occurs during reading data of a disc,
block-noises may be produced there. Repeated
reading of this location where the error occurred
(retry) can decrease the generation of block noise.
However, it can also raise the possibility of
unintended delays or stops of playback. In order to
prevent them, the recorder limits the number of
times of retry.
Introduction
Recording
Program
Timer programming cannot be completed.
• The disc is protected from deleting data.
→ Set the write-protect tab to the opposite of
page 8).
“PROTECT” (
• The disc is protected by a PC or the recorder.
→ Disable the protection on the device which
protected the disc.
• The disc space is not sufficient.
page 50) or prepare a
→ Delete unwanted data (
new disc.
• The disc is not initialized.
page 28).
→ Initialize the disc (
• The disc may contain errors.
→ Complete the physical format on the disc
page 29).
(
• The physical format on the disc is not completed.
→ Complete the physical format on the disc
page 29).
(
• Clock setting has not been completed.
page 31,
→ Complete the clock setting (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
• The programs list is full.
page 43).
→ Cancel unwanted programs (
Recording
Cannot be recorded on a DVD-RAM disc.
VCR Plus+ recording does not work properly.
Playback
• Guide channel setting is not completed.
page 40,
→ Complete the guide channel setting (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
• TV/Cable setting is not completed.
page 34,
→ Complete TV/cable setting (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
Editing
Cannot be recorded on the HDD.
Library
• The DVD mode is selected.
→ Press the HDD button.
• The disc space of the HDD is not sufficient.
page 50) or move the
→ Delete unwanted data (
page 106).
contents to DVD-RAM discs (
• Some causes such as power failure may set the
recorder to reject the operation to protect the HDD.
→ Copy necessary contents recorded in the HDD to
a DVD-RAM disc, and initialize the HDD.
Function setup
Others
167
Others
Before calling service personnel (Continued)
Remote control
The remote control does not work.
• The batteries in the remote control are exhausted.
→ Replace all the batteries in the remote control
page 12, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
(
• The light emitter of the remote control is not pointed
at the receptor of this recorder.
→ Point the emitter of the remote control at the
receptor of this recorder.
• The receptor of this recorder is located too far away
from the remote control.
→ Operate the remote control within 7 meters (23 ft)
from the receptor of this recorder.
• There are obstacles between the remote control and
this recorder.
→ Remove any obstacles.
• The receptor is disturbed by sunlight or fluorescent
light.
→ Change the place of this recorder or shield the
light.
• The remote mode is not appropriate.
→ Adjust the remote mode of the remote control and
page 48, “INSTALLATION
this recorder (
GUIDE”).
Clock
The clock blinks.
→ Complete the initial setting again (
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
page 28,
The clock does not keep time.
→ Set the time and date manually (
page 31,
“INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
→ Set “Summer time” or “Time zone” correctly
page 32, “INSTALLATION GUIDE”).
(
168
Others
Error codes on the display window
Error code
Description
ERR-01
Error detected in the physical format.
ERR-10
Exceeded volume detected.
ERR-11
Exceeded number of titles detected.
ERR-12
Exceeded number of chapters detected.
ERR-13
Copy protection information detected.
ERR-14
DVD disc access error detected.
ERR-15
Other errors detected.
ERR-16
HDD access error detected.
ERR-17
Wide image recorded at 1.4 Mbps detected.
ERR-18
Different aspects detected in the same part.
ERR-19
Different resolutions detected in the same part.
ERR-1A
Different sound quality modes detected in the same
part.
ERR-1B
Invalid control information detected.
ERR-1C
Parts created in other recorder.
ERR-1D
Parts created with “DVD compatible mode = Off”
detected.
ERR-1E
Invalid parts detected.
ERR-1F
Unexpected error detected.
ERR-2E
Menu encode error detected.
• When creating a DVD-Video
ERR-2F
Overflow of the menu size detected.
• When recording on DVD-R/RW
ERR-30
Exceeded maximum number of menus detected.
• When dubbing to DVD-R/RW
ERR-31
Recovery writing executed from compatibiliy of drive
and disc.
ERR-32
Incompatibility of disc format detected.
ERR-33
Disc protected.
ERR-34
Disc protected or system control data error detected.
ERR-35
Exceeded volume in disc budget calculation detected.
ERR-36
Recording failed. (Title not saved.)
ERR-31
Recording failed. (Title saved.)
ERR-38
Writing failed. (Title not reserved)
ERR-39
Writing failed. (Title saved.)
ERR-3A
Unexpected error detected.
ER-7000
Possible error detected in the HDD.
Introduction
The recorder display shows error codes in addition to the message screen.
Main examples are as follows.
The “**” in the “ERR - **” message indicates an error code. To delete this display, press the DISPLAY
button on the remote control.
Recording
• When creating a DVD-Video
Playback
Editing
Library
Function setup
• When recording on DVD-R/RW
Others
Note
• If you find an error code other than listed above, consult your nearest TOSHIBA dealer.
169
Others
Recording duration
Sound rate
Picture
quality rate
1.4
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.8
4.0
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.2
5.4
5.6
5.8
6.0
6.2
6.4
6.6
6.8
7.0
7.2
7.4
7.6
7.8
8.0
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.8
9.0
9.2
D/M1(192kbps)
HDD
DVD-RAM
D/M2(384kbps)
HDD
DVD-RAM
HDD
L-PCM
DVD-RAM
Remarks
Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute Hour Minute
106
76
70
64
60
56
53
50
47
44
42
40
38
37
35
34
33
31
30
29
28
27
26
26
25
24
23
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
19
19
18
18
30
17
10
57
27
32
06
04
21
55
43
43
54
15
43
19
01
49
42
39
41
46
54
06
21
38
57
19
42
08
35
03
34
05
38
12
47
23
06
04
03
03
03
03
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
04
20
59
41
26
12
01
50
41
32
25
18
12
06
01
56
51
47
43
40
36
33
30
28
25
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
08
07
05
04
02
01
95
70
65
60
56
53
50
47
45
42
40
38
37
35
34
33
31
30
29
28
27
26
26
25
24
23
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
19
19
18
18
18
21
23
08
37
41
14
10
27
00
48
48
59
19
47
22
04
52
44
42
43
48
56
08
22
39
59
20
44
09
36
05
35
06
39
13
48
24
01
05
04
03
03
03
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
26
00
42
26
13
01
50
41
33
25
18
12
06
01
56
52
47
43
40
37
33
30
28
25
23
20
18
16
14
12
10
09
07
05
04
02
01
00
58
48
45
43
41
39
37
36
34
33
32
31
29
28
28
27
26
25
24
24
23
22
22
21
21
20
20
19
19
18
18
18
33
04
34
18
16
24
42
08
42
22
09
00
56
57
01
08
19
33
49
08
29
52
17
44
12
42
13
45
19
54
30
07
03
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
19
43
35
27
20
13
07
02
57
53
48
44
41
37
34
31
28
26
23
21
19
16
14
12
11
09
07
06
04
03
01
00
Picture quality rate for LP with
D/M2.
Picture quality rate for LP with
D/M1.
Picture quality rate for SP with
D/M2.
Picture quality rate for SP with
D/M1.
Manual maximum setting for L-PCM.
Maximum value for the manual mode.
• The recording duration listed above is reference only. Not guaranteed.
• This recording duration applies to the DVD-RAM disc in its initialized condition. The display may vary depending on
the disc.
• If you subtract the actual recording duration from the duration listed in this table, the calculated time period does not
represent the remaining time.
• The consumption of space may vary depending on the picture and sound conditions of the recorded content.
• Use the remaining disc space display feature to see the remaining space in the DVD-RAM disc.
D /M1 and
D /M2, the digital recording technology for consumer products of Dolby Laboratories is used.
For
D /M1) records in Dolby Digital at 192 kbps, and Setting 2 (
D /M2) records at 384 kbps.
Setting 1 (
170
Others
Language Code List
Introduction
Table of languages and their abbreviations
Abbreviation
171
Others
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sango
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tongan
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Function setup
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
Language
Library
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laotian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Abbreviation
Editing
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MT
MY
NA
NE
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
Language
Playback
CHI (ZH)
DUT (NL)
ENG (EN)
FRE (FR)
GER (DE)
ITA (IT)
JPN (JA)
KOR (KO)
MAY (MS)
SPA (ES)
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
No alternate
language
Chinese
Dutch
English
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Malay
Spanish
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Belorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scottish Gaelic
Galician
Abbreviation
Recording
–––
Language
Others
Specification
■ Power requirement during operation
45W
■ Power requirement at standby
2.7W or below (Eco mode: off)
0.8W or below (Eco mode: on)
■ Power supply
120V AC, 60 Hz
■ Mass
4.2kg
■ External dimension
Width 430 x Height 78 x Depth 325mm
■ Incoming channels
TV: 2-69CH, Cable:1-125CH
■ Antenna input/output terminal
VHF/UHF: 75Ω, F Connector
■ Signal system
Standard NTSC Color TV system
■ Laser
Semiconductor laser, Wavelength: 650nm/780nm
■ Format
DVD-VR format
DVD-Video format
■ Image recording system
MPEG2
■ Sound recording system
Dolby Digital M1, M2, Linear PCM
■ VIDEO input
1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
Pin jack x 2 systems, 2 at rear, 1 in front
■ VIDEO output
1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
Pin jack x 2 systems, 2 at rear
■ S-VIDEO input
(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
Mini DIN4 Pin x 3 systems
(C) 0.286Vp-p (75Ω), 2 at rear, 1 in front
■ S-VIDEO output
(Y) 1.0Vp-p (75Ω), Sync signal negative,
Mini DIN4 Pin x 2 systems
(C) 0.286Vp-p (75Ω), 2 at rear
■ COMPONENT output (Y, PB, PR)
Y output (green), 1.0Vp-p (75Ω),
Sync signal negative, Pin jack x 1 system
PB, PR output (blue, red), 0.7Vp-p (75Ω),
Pin jack x 1 system each
■ AUDIO input
2.0V (rms), 50kΩ or below, pin jack
(L, R) x 3 systems
2 at rear, 1 in front
■ AUDIO output
2.0V (rms), 200Ω or above, pin jack
(L, R) x 2 systems
2 at rear
■ DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
BITSTREAM/PCM (OPTICAL terminal)
Optical connector x 1 system
■ DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
BITSTREAM/PCM (COAXIAL terminal)
0.5Vp-p (75Ω), pin jack x 1 system
■ CHANNEL CHANGE IR jack
This is for connection of the supplied IR control cable
only.
■ DV input
4-pin x 1 in front
172
Introduction
■ Remote control
Wireless remote control (SE-R0125)
■ Operating conditions
Recording
Temperature: 41°F ~ 95°F (5°C ~ 35°C),
Position: Horizontal
■ Clock display
12 hour digital display
■ Clock accuracy
Playback
Quartz (monthly deviation: approximately ±30
seconds)
• The design and specifications may change without prior
notice.
• The Illustrations and screens described in this manual
may be exaggerated or simplified for easy recognition
and may be slightly different from the actual unit.
Editing
Library
Function setup
Others
173
Limited Warranty DVD PLAYER/RECORDER
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C,. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in
the United States. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY
PERSON RECEIVING THIS DVD PLAYER/RECORDER AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED IN CANADA ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED IN THE U.S.A. ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.
Limited Ninety (90) Day Warranty on Labor*
Owner’s Manual and Demographic Card
TACP warrant this DVD PLAYER/RECORDER and its
parts against defects in materials or workmanship for a
period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT
TACP’s OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE
PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART
WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOR.
YOU MUST DELIVER THE ENTIRE DVD PLAYER/
RECORDER TO AN AUTHORIZED TACP SERVICE
STATION. YOU MUST PAY FOR ALL
TRANSPORTATION AND INSURANCE CHARGES FOR
THE DVD PLAYER/RECORDER TO AND FROM THE
SERVICE STATION.
You should read this owner’s manual thoroughly before
operating this DVD PLAYER/RECORDER. You should
complete and mail the enclosed Demographic card within
ten days after you, or the person who has given you this
product as a gift, purchased this DVD PLAYER/
RECORDER. This is one way to enable TACP to provide
you with better customer service and improved products.
Failure to return the Demographic card will not affect
your rights under this warranty.
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts*
TACP further warrant the parts in this DVD PLAYER/
RECORDER against defects in materials or
workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of
original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP
WILL, AT TACP ’S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A
DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED
PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR THE PART,
PROVIDED THAT IF A DEFECTIVE PART IS REPAIRED
OR REPLACED AFTER NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE
DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE, THE
CONSUMER PAYS ALL LABOR CHARGES INVOLVED
IN THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT. YOU MUST
DELIVER THE ENTIRE DVD PLAYER/RECORDER TO
AN AUTHORIZED TACP SERVICE STATION. YOU
MUST PAY FOR ALL TRANSPORTATION AND
INSURANCE CHARGES FOR THE DVD PLAYER/
RECORDER TO AND FROM THE SERVICE STATION.
*Rental Units
The warranty for rental units begins with the first rental or
thirty (30) days from the date of shipment to the rental
firm, whichever comes first.
*Commercial Units
DVD PLAYER/RECORDER(s) sold and used for
commercial purposes have a limited ninety (90) day
warranty.
174
Your Responsibility
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
(1) You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of
purchase.
(2) All in-warranty servicing of this DVD PLAYER/
RECORDER must be made by a specified
Authorized TACP Service Station.
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if the
DVD PLAYER/RECORDER is purchased and
operated in the U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.
(4) Labor service charges for set installation, set up,
adjustment of customer controls and installation or
repair of hook up related items and/or antenna
systems are not covered by these warranties.
Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna
systems are your responsibility.
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or
workmanship as limited above and do not extend to
any DVD PLAYER/RECORDER or parts which have
been lost or discarded by you or to damage to DVD
PLAYER/RECORDER or parts caused by misuse,
accident, Acts of God, such as lightning or
fluctuations in electric power, improper installation,
improper maintenance or use in violation of
instructions furnished by TACP; or to units which
have been modified or had the serial number
removed, altered, defaced or rendered illegible.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL
RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE IN THE
U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE
BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.
(2) You must include a copy or original bill of sale or
other proof of purchase along with the entire DVD
PLAYER/RECORDER to the Authorized TACP
Service Station specified by the Call Center. You
must pay for all transportation and insurance
charges for the DVD PLAYER/RECORDER to the
Service Station.
Recording
HOW STATE LAW RELATES TO WARRANTY
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this
manual and checking the section “Troubleshooting”, you
find that service is needed:
(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty service
for your DVD PLAYER/RECORDER, contact TACP
Call Center’s toll free number at 1-866-583-7353.
Introduction
How to Obtain Warranty Services
Playback
For additional information, visit TACP’s web site:
www.tacp.toshiba.com.
Time for Taking Action
Editing
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY
STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXPRESSLY
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE
EXCEPTION OF ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE
LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY
LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS
EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS AND
SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO
THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL TACP OR BE LIABLE FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.
Library
Function setup
No person, agent, distributor, dealer or company is
authorized to change, modify or extend the terms of
these warranties in any manner whatsoever. The time
within which action must be commenced to enforce any
obligation of TACP arising under this warranty or under
any law of the United States or of any state thereof is
hereby limited to 90 days from the date you discovered
or should have discovered, the defect. This limitation
does not apply to implied warranties arising under the
law of any state of the U.S.A.
Others
175
- IMPORTANT CANADIAN WARRANTY INFORMATION
GARANTIE CANADIENNE
STANDARD WARRANTY
TYPE OF SET
WARRANTY PERIOD
DVD Player
DVD/VCR Combination
Home Theatre in a Box
DVD Recorder
Portable DVD
12 MONTHS
CANADIAN WARRANTY
Toshiba of Canada Limited (TCL) makes the following
limited warranties to original consumers in Canada.
Please retain your “Bill of Sale” as proof of purchase.
To obtain a “Canadian Warranty” please register
online at www.toshiba.ca.
Canadian Warranty Information
Should service be required on this unit during the one year
warranty period, TCL's option will be to repair or exchange the
defective unit. It will be necessary to follow this procedure:
Contact: Toshiba of Canada Limited at the Consumer
Electronics Group, customer support line.
Phone: 1-800-268-3404
Email:
[email protected]
All in-warranty repairs must be made by an authorized TCL
service centre.
For service exchange TCL will arrange to have the unit picked
up by courier and a replacement unit will be returned via same
courier. (Note: A major credit card number will be required as a
charge of $25.00 will apply if no fault is found with the unit.)
During the first 3 months of ownership, a new unit will be supplied as a replacement. During the remainder of the warranty
period a service-renewed unit will be supplied.
The original “Bill of Sale” must be provided as proof of purchase (it will be returned with the replacement unit.)
This 12-month warranty will be strictly adhered to.
Out of warranty units should be repaired by a TCL authorized
service centre.
Note: It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure proper
packaging. Should damage in shipping occur, due to poor
packaging, a charge back for the repair will result.
This warranty applies to the original purchaser only and is not
transferable.
This warranty does not apply to sets that have been subjected
to misuse, neglect, accident, physical damage or acts of
nature.
Sets with the serial number removed, altered, replaced or
defaced will not be covered by this warranty.
The warranties from TCL are effective only if the product is
purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and
operated in Canada.
Products utilized for rental or commercial purposes are not
covered by this warranty.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, guaranties or
agreements, whether expressed or implied, and no person,
agent distributor, dealer, service centre or company is authorized to change, modify or extend its terms in any manner
whatsoever.
176
GARANTIE NORMALE
TYPE D’APPAREIL
DURÉE DE LA GARANTIE:
Lecteur DVD
DVD/magnétoscope combo
Cinéma maison dans une boîte
Enregistreur DVD
DVD Portatif
12 MOIS
GARANTIE CANADIENNE
1) Toshiba du Canada Limitée (TCL) offre au Canada les
garanties limitées suivantes aux consommateurs originaux. Veuillez conserver votre « facture » comme preuve
d’achat. Pour obtenir une garantie canadienne,
veuillez vous inscrire en ligne à www.toshiba.ca
Information sur la garantie Canadienne
Si vous avez besoin de service sur cet appareil au cours le
l'année de garantie, Toshiba du Canada Limitée aura l'op tion
de réparer ou échanger l'appareil défectueux. Vous devrez
suivre la procédure suivante:
Contact: Toshiba du Canada Limitée au Groupe Électronique
aux consommateurs, service à la clientèle.
Tél:
1-800-268-3404
Courriel: [email protected]
Toutes les réparations au cours de la garantie doivent être faites
par un centre de service autorisé Toshiba.
Pour un échange TCL s'assurera qu'un service de courrier
ramassera l'unité et qu'un appareil de remplacement soit
expédié par le même service de courrier.
(Note: Un numéro de carte de crédit sera requis car une
charge de 25,00$ sera appliquée si toutefois l’appareil n’avait
aucun problème de fonctionnement.)
Une nouvelle unité sera fournie comme remplacement durant
les premiers 3 mois de propriété. Par contre durant la balance
de la garantie une unité remise à neuf sera fournie.
La «facture originale doit être fournie comme preuve d’achat
(elle vous sera retournée avec l’unité de remplacement.)
Cette garantie de 12 mois sera strictement adhérée.
Les unités hors de garantie devraient être réparées par un
centre de service autorisé Toshiba.
Note: C’est la responsabilité du propriétaire de s’assurer que
l’emballage est adéquat. Vous serez facturé pour toutes réparations causées par des dommages encourus à cause d’un
emballage non adéquat.
Cette garantie est octroyée à l’acheteur initial et n’est pas
transférable. Cette garantie ne s’aplique pas aux appareils qui
ont été sujets aux abus, négligences, accidents, dommages
physiques ou actes naturels.
Les appareils dont le numéro de série a été enlevé, altété,
remplacé ou barbouillé ne sont pas couverts par cette
garantie.
Les garanties de TCL sont valides seulement sur les unités
sont achetées et utilisées au Canada d'un marchand autorisé
TCL.
Cette garantie ne couvre pas les produits de location ou à
usage commercial. Cette garantie remplace toutes autres
garanties ou ententes exprimées ou sous-entendues. Aucune
personne, agent, distributeur, concessionaire ou compagnie
n’est autorisé à changer, modifier ou prolonger les termes de
cette garantie de quelque façon que ce soit.
Toshiba of Canada Limited 191 McNabb Street Markham, Ontario L3R 8H2
Memo
Introduction
Recording
Playback
Editing
Library
Function setup
Others
177
Memo
178
Memo
Introduction
Recording
Playback
Editing
Library
Function setup
Others
179